JP7149564B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines, and is particularly applicable to pachinko gaming machines and the like.

A game machine is provided with a payout device (payout means) for paying out game balls as rental balls or prize balls. The payout device is generally configured to be able to pay out game balls by driving a payout motor, solenoid, or the like (see Patent Document 1, for example).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-347018

In a gaming machine equipped with the above-described payout device, for example, when a special game advantageous to the player is started due to the occurrence of a big win or the like, a game ball is inserted into a predetermined ball entrance such as a big winning opening during the special game. A large amount of prize balls are paid out based on the number of incoming balls. In this case, the dispensing device continuously performs the dispensing operation, but the continuous dispensing operation places a load on the dispensing device, and there is a possibility that the dispensing device may malfunction due to heat generated by the dispensing motor or the like. In this regard, in the technique described in Patent Document 1, the driving of the payout motor is temporarily stopped for each payout of one game ball to suppress the heat generation (temperature rise) of the payout motor. Repeatedly stopping and starting the drive of the payout motor each time a coin is paid out complicates drive control of the payout motor.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to prevent an increase in the temperature of the electric drive source while avoiding complicated drive control of the electric drive source such as a dispensing motor. To provide a game machine capable of suppressing

In order to solve the aforementioned problems, the present invention employs the following configurations.
That is, the gaming machine of the present invention is
A gaming machine comprising payout means for putting out game balls by driving a payout motor,
supply means for supplying drive current to the dispensing motor;
a control means for controlling the dispensing motor;
an error monitoring means for monitoring errors related to the payout of game balls ;
The control means receives a payout request for a predetermined number of game balls and turns the payout motor into an energized state on the basis of establishment of conditions for starting a payout operation for paying out the predetermined number of game balls by the payout means. It is possible to execute drive start control to start driving of
In the drive start control, at the start of the payout operation, the rotating shaft of the payout motor is rotated while the payout motor is kept in an energized state until a predetermined non-rotational energization period elapses from the start of the energization of the payout motor. and starting rotation of the rotating shaft based on the lapse of the non-rotating energization period ,
Further, the control means can execute drive stop control for stopping the drive of the payout motor when the error occurs after the drive start control is executed but before the payout of the predetermined number of game balls is completed. ,
In the drive stop control, the rotation of the rotating shaft is stopped while the payout motor is kept in an energized state for a period longer than the non-rotation energizing period.
This is the gist of it.

According to the present invention described above, it is possible to suppress the temperature rise of the electric drive source while avoiding the drive control of the electric drive source such as the payout motor from becoming complicated.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a back view of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view showing the configuration of the game board of the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 4 is an enlarged view of the main display shown in FIG. 3, showing display devices provided in the gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the gaming machine. It is a table showing the correspondence between types of winnings and opening patterns of the big winning openings. It is the table|surface which shows the various random numbers which the microcomputer for game control acquires. (A) is a hit determination table, (B) is a big hit type determination table, (C) is a normal symbol hit determination table, and (D) is a normal symbol variation pattern selection table. It is a fluctuation pattern table. 4 is a flowchart of main control main processing; 4 is a flowchart of interrupt processing; It is a flow chart of a starting port sensor detection process. It is a flow chart of the process at the time of starting ball entry. It is a flow chart of normal figure operation processing. It is a flowchart of normal symbol standby processing. It is a flow chart of normal symbol suitability determination processing. It is a flowchart of normal symbol random number shift processing. It is a flow chart of processing during normal design fluctuation. It is a flow chart of normal design decision processing. It is a flowchart of ordinary electric accessories processing. It is a flowchart of special figure operation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of the special figure 2 propriety determination process. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 propriety determination processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of processing during special symbol fluctuation. It is a flowchart of special design decision processing. It is a flow chart of special electric auditors processing 1 (jackpot game). It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of special electric auditors processing 2 (small hit game). 9 is a flowchart of specific area sensor detection processing; It is a flow chart of the number of pending ball processing. 7 is a flowchart of power-off monitoring processing; 9 is a flowchart of sub-control main processing; 4 is a flowchart of reception interrupt processing; 10 is a flowchart of 2 ms timer interrupt processing; 10 is a flowchart of 10 ms timer interrupt processing; 6 is a flowchart of drive restriction processing; 8 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing; 8 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing; It is a flow chart of the fluctuation effect start processing. It is a flow chart of end processing of fluctuation production. 4 is a flowchart of drive data output processing; (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the initial state of the movable frame decorative member, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the operating state of the movable frame decorative member. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the arrangement configuration of an image display device; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of a display screen on which variable effects are performed; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of a display screen on which variable effects are performed; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a layer structure of a performance image; (a) is a front view showing the configuration of a game board according to another mode 2, and (b) is a front view showing the configuration of a game board according to another mode 3. It is a perspective view showing the internal structure of the dispensing device. It is a perspective view showing an internal structure of a dispensing device and a gutter member. It is a flow chart of a payout control main process. 4 is a flowchart of reception interrupt processing; 10 is a flowchart of 1 ms timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart of a payout device control process. 10 is a flowchart of payout number setting processing. (a) is a flow chart of payout motor energization start processing, and (b) is a flow chart of payout motor rotation start processing. It is a flow chart of processing during payout motor rotation. It is a flow chart of processing during payout motor rotation. It is a flow chart of payout motor energization stop processing. It is a flow chart of payout-related control processing. 8 is a flowchart of command analysis processing; It is a timing chart of payout motor control. (a) is a timing chart of the payout operation, and (b) is a timing chart when an error occurs during the payout operation.

Next, embodiments of the present invention will be described using examples. In the following embodiments, the game medium used in the game is a game ball, and a pachinko game machine (pinball game machine) capable of proceeding with the game by shooting the game ball toward the game board surface. An application of the invention will be described. Specifically, when the special symbols are variably displayed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port, and when the special symbols variably displayed are stopped and the jackpot symbols are stopped and displayed, the player receives a predetermined amount. A so-called “type 1” pachinko machine capable of executing a jackpot game (special game) in which a game profit (for example, a prize ball) can be awarded will be described as an example.

In the following description, simply the front side (front) means the front side (the side where the player is positioned during a game) when the gaming machine is viewed from the front, and simply the rear side (rear) means the game machine. It is the rear side (rear side) when the machine is viewed from the front. In addition, simply the upper side (above), the lower side (downward), the left side (left side), and the right side (right side) refer to the respective directions of up, down, left, and right when the game machine is viewed from the front. , for example, refer to upper, lower, left, and right sides in FIGS.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2 mounted inside the game machine frame 50. The game board 2 is a game machine. It is configured to be detachable from the frame 50 . FIG. 3 shows the game board 2 removed from the game machine frame 50 . The game machine frame 50 includes a front frame 51 having a decorative surface, a main body frame 52 for mounting the game board 2, etc., and an outer frame 53 for mounting the pachinko game machine 1 on island facilities of the hall. The front frame 51, the main body frame 52 and the outer frame 53 are pivotally supported at one end and configured to be openable and closable.

As shown in FIG. 1, the front frame 51 has a shooting handle 60 for shooting game balls with a shooting intensity corresponding to the amount of operation (rotational angle) of the player, and stores and stores game balls to be used in the game. A hitting ball supply tray (hereinafter also referred to as "upper tray") 61 capable of supplying game balls to the shooting device side and a surplus ball receiving tray (hereinafter also referred to as "lower tray") 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the upper tray 61. is provided. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 2, on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the back side of the main body frame 52), a ball tank 150 capable of storing game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown) of the hall, A gutter member 151 formed with a ball passage through which game balls from the ball tank 150 can flow down, and a payout device 120 (payout device) capable of paying out the game balls flowing down the ball passage of the gutter member 151 as prize balls or rental balls. means) and are provided. Game balls paid out by the payout device 120 are discharged to the upper tray 61 through a game ball passage (not shown), and discharged to the lower tray 62 when the upper tray 61 is full.

Above the upper tray 61 in the front frame 51, a visual window 51a is provided to allow the surface of the game board 2 (game board surface) to be visually recognized from the outside when the front frame 51 is closed. The viewing window 51a is made of a transparent glass plate, and the player can view a game area 3 formed on the surface of the game board 2 and the back side of the game board 2 through the viewing window 51a (glass plate). It is possible to see the display contents of the image display devices 71 and 72 arranged in the .

In addition, on the front frame 51, there are provided a first effect button 63a and a second effect button 63b (these two effect buttons are collectively referred to as a (also referred to simply as a "production button 63"), a decorative frame lamp 66 capable of emitting various lights depending on the game situation, and various sounds (sound effects) depending on the game situation. A pair of left and right speakers 67 and the like are also provided. The frame lamp 66 and the speaker 67 are a kind of electrical parts for presentation that are driven by receiving power supplied from a power supply board 109, which will be described later. Furthermore, on the upper surface of the front frame 51 and the upper plate 61, there is a game ball lending function within the range of the value balance (valuable balance) recorded in the recording medium (for example, card or coin) accepted by the CR unit. A CR operation unit (not shown) is provided which is operated to return the recording medium. The CR operation unit includes a ball lending button for instructing the lending of game balls (that is, paying out the rented balls), a return button for instructing the return of the recording medium, and the value balance recorded in the recording medium (valuable A balance display section (frequency display LED) for displaying the balance is provided. The CR unit of this embodiment is configured as a card unit 135 in which a prepaid card is used as a usable recording medium.

The frame lamp 66 is composed of full-color LEDs, and an LED board (decorative board) on which the LEDs are mounted is provided on the front frame 51 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1, inside the left side of the front frame 51 (the left side of the viewing window 51a), a left frame LED board 66L is provided with a length that extends vertically, and the right side of the front frame 51 ( A right frame LED board 66R is provided inside the viewing window 51a to extend vertically. The left and right front sides of the front frame 51 facing the LEDs mounted on these LED substrates are resin lens cover portions that allow the light emitted by the LEDs to pass through (have translucency). The light from the frame lamp 66 (frame LED) is diffused by the cover portion.

Here, in this embodiment, the left and right lens cover portions of the front frame 51 are divided into four regions, respectively, and the frame lamps 66 (frame LEDs) emit light (left frame LED board 66L and right frame LED) in units of each region. driving of the substrate 66R) can be controlled. That is, as shown in FIG. 1, the lens cover portion on the left side of the front frame 51 is defined as a left first region L1, a left second region L2, a left third region L3 and a left fourth region L4 in order from the top. The lens cover portion on the right side of the frame 51 is a first right region R1, a second right region R2, a third right region R3, and a fourth right region R4, in order from the top. It is possible to control the light emission mode (lighting, blinking, extinguishing, color, amount of light (brightness), etc.) of the frame lamp 66 (frame LED) for each of these regions. It is possible to make the mode different or make the light emission mode of each region the same. The effect of driving (lighting) the frame lamp 66 (frame LED) is also referred to as a “frame light emitting effect”.

The performance button 63 functions as an input means for inputting by the player, and is a kind of electrical component for performance that is driven by receiving power supplied from a power supply board 109, which will be described later. As the effect buttons 63, a first effect button 63a provided on the top surface of the center of the upper plate and a second effect button 63b provided toward the front side in the lower left part of the front frame 51 are provided, and the types of game effects are provided. You can use the production button to be used according to the situation. For example, when the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b is operated during execution of the game effect, a predetermined operation corresponding effect is performed based on the operation. Incidentally, the structure of the effect button 63 is not limited to the mode of the present embodiment, and it is sufficient if the player can make an input. For example, an input means ( For example, it may be a haunting type, a touch sensor type, etc.), or it may be a non-contact type input means (photoelectric type, etc.) that detects the proximity of a part of the player's body and performs input. good. In addition, even if the effect button receives power supplied from the power supply board 109, which will be described later, the effect operation (movable effect operation means) such as protruding upward or to the front side or vibrating is performed. good.

Furthermore, between the left and right speakers 67 above the front frame 51, a frame movable decorative member 13 ( Frame side movable production device) is provided. The frame movable decorative member 13 of the present embodiment mainly includes a box-shaped housing portion 13a with an open upper surface, an effect movable body 13b (see FIG. 49(b)) housed in the housing portion 13a, and a It is composed of an electric drive source such as a stepping motor. In the initial state before the frame movable decorative member 13 is driven, as shown in FIGS. It is in an invisible state (non-operating state, initial state). In the state (initial state) in which the effect movable body 13b is housed in the housing portion 13a, when the frame movable decorative member 13 is driven (operated) based on the fulfillment of the condition for starting the effect by the frame movable decorative member 13, FIG. As shown in b), the effect movable body 13b rises from the initial position (accommodated position) to a predetermined operating position, protrudes upward from the accommodating portion 13a, and becomes visible from the outside (operating state). . In addition, the effect movable body 13b is provided with an emblem accessory 13s imitating a star, and the emblem accessory 13s emits light, rotates, or the like in a state in which the effect movable body 13b protrudes (appears). It is doable. By driving the frame movable decorative member 13 to make the effect movable body 13b appear in this way, the player's sense of anticipation for the win is heightened.

On the other hand, in a state (operating state) in which the effect movable body 13b has moved (raised) to the operating position, when the frame movable decorative member 13 is driven (operated) based on the fulfillment of the condition for ending the effect by the frame movable decorative member 13, the effect The movable body 13b moves (lowers) to the initial position (origin), and enters a state of being housed in the housing portion 13a as shown in FIG. 49(a). The mechanical structure (configuration) of the movable frame decorative member 13 that realizes the appearing and retracting motion (vertical movement) of the effect movable body 13b is not directly related to the gist of the present invention, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted. It can be configured using known mechanisms and members such as a rack and pinion, a lead screw, and a damper. In addition, in the present embodiment, by driving the frame movable decorative member 13, the time required for the production movable body 13b to move (reach) from the initial position to the operating position (appearance operation time) and the production movable body 13b to the operating position The time (recovery operation time) required for moving (reaching) from the initial position to the initial position is 5500 ms (5.5 seconds). In this way, the frame movable decorative member 13 (rendering movable body 13b) performs relatively slow motions (appearance motion, return motion) because of the staging effect of the frame movable decorative member 13 (rendering movable body 13b), This is due to the consideration of the influence of vibrations and the like during driving.

Here, as shown in FIG. 49(a), the state (initial state) in which the effect movable body 13b is housed in the housing portion 13a before driving (before operation) of the frame movable decorative member 13 is referred to as the "first state." 49(b), after the movable frame decorative member 13 is driven and the effect movable body 13b protrudes (appears) upward from the housing portion 13 (operating state). It is also called “second state”. Furthermore, the effect of driving (operating) the frame movable decorative member 13 (the effect movable body 13b) is also called "frame movable effect". Further, as a drive mode for driving the frame movable decorative member 13, the drive mode for lowering (moving) the effect movable body 13b in the operating state (second state) from the operating position to the initial position is referred to as the "first drive. A driving mode in which the effect movable body 13b in the initial state (first state) is raised (moved) from the initial position (accommodated position) to the operating position is also referred to as a "second driving mode".

The game board 2 is mainly composed of a transparent plate made of transparent synthetic resin such as acrylic or polycarbonate. In this embodiment, a transparent plate is attached to a rectangular base member made of resin. As shown in FIG. 3, the surface (board surface) of the game board 2 (transparent plate) is provided with a substantially arcuate guide piece 4 for guiding the game ball shot by operating the shooting handle 60 . The guide piece 4 is composed of a rib-shaped protruding piece or a metal rail member that protrudes from the surface of the game board 2, and is mainly composed of an outer guide piece 4a (outer rail) provided on the outer peripheral side, It is composed of an inner guide piece 4b (inner rail) which is provided inside the outer guide piece 4a with an interval to allow passage of the game ball. The game board 2 is also referred to as a "transparent game board".

Of the board surface of the game board 2, the area inside the guide piece 4 (outer guide piece 4a) serves as a game area 3 in which game balls can flow down. In the game area 3, a game nail (not shown) guides the game ball in a predetermined direction while changing the movement of the game ball, and a game ball moving (flowing down) in the area passes or enters. There are gates, entrances, etc. that can be used. The gate, entrance, etc. will be described later. In the game area 3, the area on the left side of the approximate center of the board is defined as a left game area 3L, and the area on the right side of the approximate center of the board surface is defined as the right game area 3R. In addition, a ball return prevention piece 6 is provided at the tip (upper end) of the inner guide piece 4b positioned on the left gaming area 3L side. By crossing over, the game ball can enter the game area 3 (left game area 3L). In addition, the ball return prevention piece 6 prevents the game ball once guided to the game area 3 (entered the game area 3) from returning to the launching device side.

An opening 2H is provided substantially in the center of the board surface of the game board 2, and a center decoration 10 is attached to the edge of the opening 2H. The center decorative body 10 (opening 2H) includes most of the display screen 71a (display area) of the lower image display device 71 provided on the back side of the game board 2 and the upper image display provided on the back side of the game board 2. A part of the display screen 72a (display area) of the device 72 (downward from the center of the screen) is surrounded by a substantially arc shape. The display contents of the lower image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and the upper image display device 72 (display screen 72a) can be visually recognized through the inside of the center decoration 10 (that is, the opening 2H). As described above, since the game board 2 is configured as a transparent game board, the display contents of the upper image display device 72 (display screen 72a) can be displayed inside the center decoration 10 (of the opening 2H). It is possible to visually recognize (perspective) not only through the upper part) but also through the surrounding game area 3.

In addition, on the back side of the game board 2 (game area 3), a plurality of decorative board surface lamps 5 (see FIG. 5) capable of emitting various lights according to the game situation are provided. The decoration (light emission) by the board surface lamp 5 can be visually recognized through the game area 3 (transparent game board). Like the frame lamp 66, the board lamp 5 is also made up of full-color LEDs, and is a type of electrical component for presentation that is driven by power supplied from a power supply board 109, which will be described later. The effect of driving (lighting) the board surface lamp 5 (board LED) is also called "board light emitting effect".

In this embodiment, the upper image display device 72 is arranged above the lower image display device 71, but the upper portion (approximately 1/3 of the upper portion) of the display screen 72a of the upper image display device 72 is It protrudes from the upper end of the transparent game board forming the board 2. - 特許庁Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50, the lower end of the upper image display device 72 is positioned above the front side of the lower image display device 71 (upper portion of the display screen 71a), and the upper end of the upper image display device 72 is positioned above the game display device 71. The image display devices 71 and 72 are arranged on the back side of the game board 2 so that the upper part of the display screen 72a protrudes upward from the upper end (upper side) of the game board 2 (transparent plate). mounted on the side. The image display devices 71 and 72 are assembled (mounted) by, for example, holding the image display devices 71 and 72 on a display device holding member (base member) (not shown) and screwing the holding member onto the back surface of the game board 2. It is made by fixing with a stop or the like. Thereby, the image display devices 71 and 72 and the game board 2 can be integrated. However, the manner in which the image display devices 71 and 72 are assembled is not limited to this. Aspects are possible. Also, the angle formed by the display screen 71a of the lower image display device 71 and the display screen 72a of the upper image display device 72 affects the visual field (visibility) of the player seated in front of the gaming machine and the layout space of the image display device. Considering the above, it is preferable to set the angle within the range of 135 degrees to 175 degrees.

And, on the upper part of the surface side of the game board 2, there is a transparent cover covering the portion outside (above) the outer guide piece 4a, including the protruding portion (protruding portion) of the upper image display device 72 (display screen 72a). A cover 2K is attached (see FIGS. 3 and 50). Therefore, the display contents of the upper image display device 72 (display screen 72a) are displayed inside the center decorative body 10 (that is, the opening 2H), the game area 3 around it, and further outside the game area 3 (from the outer guide piece 4a). It is possible to visually recognize through a cover 2K that covers the outside).

The lower image display device 71 and the upper image display device 72 are each composed of a liquid crystal display device, and are a kind of electric parts for performance that are driven by receiving power supplied from a power supply board 109, which will be described later. The display screen size (size of the display area) of both display devices is that the lower image display device 71 is larger than the upper image display device 72 (in other words, the upper image display device 72 is larger than the lower image display device 71). is also small). On the display screens of these two image display devices, various effects are presented according to the game situation. As a typical example of the production, three production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R (also simply referred to as "production pattern 8") are displayed in synchronism with the fluctuation display of the first special pattern and the second special pattern, which will be described later. There is a production pattern game production (also called “variation production”) to be performed. The display contents of the display screen shown in FIG. 3 show an outline when the variable effect is performed.

The variable display of the production pattern 8 in this embodiment is performed using the display screen 71a of the lower image display device 71 and the display screen 72a of the upper image display device 72, and the display screens 71a and 72a are straddled. A production pattern display area (also referred to as a "production display section") is provided. Both display screens 71a and 72a are also provided with a background display area for displaying a background image that constitutes the screen background (background of variable effect). This background display area can also be regarded as the "effect display section".

Here, the lower image display device 71 is also called "first display means" or "first image display means", and the upper image display device 72 is called "second display means" or "second image display means". Also called Further, the lower image display device 71 and the upper image display device 72 are also collectively referred to as "image display device", and the image display device is also referred to as "display means" or "image display means". Further, the display screen 71a is also called "first display screen", the display screen 72a is also called "second display screen", and the display screens 71a and 72a are collectively called "display screen".

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51(a), the effect pattern 8 is displayed by scrolling from the top of the display screen 72a to the bottom of the display screen 71a (in the vertical direction). and When the variable display of the effect pattern 8 is finished, the effect pattern 8 is stopped and displayed on the display screen 71a as shown in FIG. 3 and FIG. 51(b). The effect symbol game effect (variable effect) is basically performed using both the display screen 71a of the lower image display device 71 and the display screen 72a of the upper image display device 72, as shown in FIGS. However, depending on the aspect of the variable effect (variable effect pattern), an auxiliary effect display of the effect display performed on the display screen 71a (for example, display of letters or characters indicating the type of reach effect being executed or effect mode) This may be done on the display screen 72b. In other words, the lower image display device 71 with a large display screen size may be used as the main display device, and the upper image display device 72 with a small display screen size may be used as the sub display device.

In addition, in addition to the vertical direction, there is a mode of scrolling display of the performance symbols 8 in the horizontal direction, the oblique direction, or the like, for example. The effect pattern display area 7b is composed of, for example, three pattern display areas of "left", "middle", and "right". A symbol 8C is displayed, and a right effect symbol 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area. The positions of the left, middle, and right pattern display areas do not need to be provided separately, and the display areas for the left, middle, and right performance patterns may each be the entire pattern display area (the performance pattern display area 7b). .

The production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R of this embodiment are each composed of a plurality of patterns (identification information) representing numbers "1" to "9". Displayed on a first special symbol display device 41a (also referred to as a "first special symbol display unit"), which will be described later, by a combination (stop display mode) of left, middle, and right performance symbols that are stop-displayed in the performance symbol display area 7b. The display result of the variable display of the first special symbol to be displayed, and the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display device 41b (also referred to as "second special symbol display unit"), that is, The result of the special symbol suitability determination (simply referred to as "appropriateness determination") is displayed so that the player can easily recognize it. In this embodiment, the stop order of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that are displayed in a variable manner is, in principle, "left→right→middle". For this reason, the left effect pattern 8L is also referred to as the "first stop pattern", the right effect pattern 8R is also referred to as the "second stop pattern", and the middle effect pattern 8C is also referred to as the "final stop pattern" or " It is also called "third stop symbol". Also, either the first special symbol or the second special symbol may be simply referred to as "symbol" or "identification information". In addition, the normal symbol is "General", the special symbol is "Special", the first special symbol is "Special 1", "1st Special", and the 2nd special is "Special 2" and "2nd Special". There is a thing called.

For example, when the result of the special symbol propriety determination is a 15R big hit, it is possible to stop and display the production symbol with the same three-digit number such as "777". In addition, when the result of the special symbol suitability determination is a 2R big hit or a small hit, a preset chance symbol such as "135" or a special symbol (dedicated symbol) such as "3*3" is used. It is possible to stop and display the production pattern with . Furthermore, when the result of the special symbol propriety determination is out, it is possible to stop and display the effect symbol with at least one different symbol among the three symbols such as ``637'' and ``373''. . As a result, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game by looking at the stop-displayed effect symbols. In other words, the player generally does not directly grasp the result of the special symbol suitability determination by looking at the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b, but rather the effect The performance symbols displayed in the symbol display area 7b are seen and grasped.

Here, among the stop display modes of the performance symbols, the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol success/failure determination is a big hit may be referred to as a "jackpot mode", a "specific mode", a "specific display result", or the like. There are cases where the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol propriety determination is "off" is called "off mode", "non-specific mode", "non-specific display result", or the like. In addition, the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol suitability determination is a small hit may be referred to as a "small win mode", a "predetermined mode", a "predetermined display result", or the like.

In the lower center (lower region) of the display screen 71a of the lower image display device 71, the first effect suspension 9a (also referred to as "first special figure suspension image") is displayed according to the number of stored first special figure suspensions, which will be described later. and a second effect reservation 9b (also referred to as a "second special figure reservation image") according to the number of stored second special figure reservations to be described later. ), a second effect pending display area 9d (second effect pending display portion) is provided. Depending on the display mode (display number) of the first effect suspension and the second effect suspension, the number of memories of the first special figure suspension and the second The stored number of the second special figure reservation displayed on the special figure reservation display 43b can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. Incidentally, the first effect suspension 9a and the second effect suspension 9b are also collectively referred to as "effect suspension" or "special figure suspension image".

In the upper left part (upper left display area) of the display screen 72a of the upper image display device 72, there are three small production patterns 8l, 8c, 8r (simply referred to as "small production pattern 8a") obtained by reducing the numbers of the production pattern 8. A small effect symbol display area 8b (small effect symbol display portion) to be displayed is provided. The small effect pattern 8a starts variable display with the start of the variable display of the effect pattern 8, and ends the variable display (stop display) with the end (stop display) of the variable display of the effect pattern 8 (Fig. 51 ). As shown in FIG. 52, even if two of the three performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and the remaining one is variably displayed due to execution of the ready-to-win performance or the like, the three small performance symbols 8l are displayed. , 8c, and 8r all continue the variable display. That is, the small effect symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are variably displayed in synchronism while the special symbols are variably displayed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, the variable display of the small effect symbols 8 is such that each small effect symbol is rotated in the left-right direction (horizontal direction) in the small effect symbol display area 8b. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 3 and FIG. 51(b), the stop display mode of the small effect pattern 8a is the same as the stop display mode of the effect pattern 8, and is a 3-digit number double or loose. It is in accordance with the result of the special design propriety determination.

In addition, in the upper right portion (upper right display area) of the display screen 72a of the upper image display device 72, there is provided a variation number display area 77 (number display section) for displaying a number image 77a indicating the number of variations of special symbols. On the right side thereof, special figure 1 fourth symbol 78a that is displayed fluctuatingly and stopped in synchronization with the first special symbol, and special figure 2 fourth symbol that is displayed fluctuatingly and stopped in synchronization with the second special symbol A fourth symbol display area 78 for displaying 78b is provided. The frequency image 77a displayed in the variation frequency display area 77 indicates the number of times (variation display frequency) of special symbol variation display performed until a big hit occurs in a low base state, which will be described later. 1 is added and displayed for each variable display. That is, in the high base state, the frequency image 77a (variation display frequency) is not displayed in the variation frequency display area 77. FIG. The frequency image 77a of this embodiment expresses the variable display frequency in Arabic numerals, and can display up to four digits (thousands place).

The special figure 1 fourth symbol 78a displayed in the fourth symbol display area 78 performs variable display and stop display according to the variable display and stop display of the first special symbol. Specifically, the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol 78a is performed in the form of blinking display, and the stop display is performed in the form of lighting display. This lighting display (stopped display of special figure 1 fourth symbol 78a) is a color (for example, off "blue", small Hit "green", big hit "red", etc.). Similarly, the special figure 2 fourth symbol 78b performs variable display and stop display according to the variable display and stop display of the second special symbol. Specifically, the variable display of the special figure 2 fourth symbol 78b is performed in the form of blinking display, and the stop display is performed in the form of lighting display. This lighting display (stopped display of the special figure 2 fourth symbol 78a) is the color (for example, off "blue", big hit "red", etc.).

In this way, the reason why the fourth pattern and the small effect pattern 8a are displayed is that the reach effect, the development effect, etc. Special patterns (effects This is because a situation may occur in which it is difficult to grasp whether or not the symbol) is being variably displayed. In addition, the special figure 1 fourth design 78a and the special figure 2 fourth design 78b are also collectively referred to as "fourth design". In addition, an image showing information related to the progress of the game, such as effect suspension (special figure suspension image), fourth pattern, small effect pattern 8a, etc. displayed on the image display device, is also called an "information image". Further, any one or all of the effect pattern 8, the small effect pattern 8a and the fourth pattern may be simply referred to as "symbol", "effect pattern" or "identification information".

In addition, on the display screens of the image display devices 71 and 72, in addition to displaying the performance symbol game performance (fluctuation performance) using the performance symbols as described above, the winning game performance and the customer A waiting demo effect or the like is displayed. Furthermore, in the performance symbol game performance, winning game performance, and demonstration performance, in addition to performance symbols such as numbers, various performance images other than performance symbols such as background images and character images are displayed.

Near the center of the game board 2 (game area 3), as described above, the center decorative body 10 surrounds most of the display screen 71a and part of the display screen 72a (the portion below the center of the screen). is provided. A stage portion 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which game balls can roll is provided at the lower portion of the center decorative body 10 . A hollow warp portion 12 is provided on the left side of the center decorative body 10 . The warp part 12 is provided with a warp entrance and a warp exit, receives the game ball flowing down the game area 3 from the warp entrance, discharges the game ball from the warp exit and guides it to the stage part 11 . A game ball guided to the rolling surface of the stage portion 11 is more likely than a game ball not guided to the stage portion 11 to enter a first start port 20, which will be described later.

In addition, on the lower back side, the left back side, and the right back side of the center decoration body 10, there are three board movable decorative members 14L, 14C, and 14R (generally referred to as "board movable decorative member 14") that can move along with the game performance. ) are provided respectively. The board movable decorative members 14L, 14C, and 14R each include an electric drive source such as a stepping motor (not shown), and are driven by power supplied from a power supply board 109, which will be described later. A type of electrical component. In FIG. 3, the board movable decorative member 14 (board side movable effect device) is not in operation (initial state), and only a part of the board movable decorative member 14 is visible. One, two or three of the board movable decorative members 14L, 14C, and 14R appear in front of the display screen 71a by operating (driving) in accordance with the execution of the highly probable game effect. It becomes a covering state (operating state), and most of it becomes visible. In the initial state, the board movable decorative member 14L is hidden on the left side of the screen, and when it moves obliquely upward to the right toward the center of the screen, it appears in the front side of the screen. Also, the board movable decorative member 14C is hidden at the bottom of the screen in the initial state, and by moving upward toward the center of the screen, it appears in the front side of the screen. Further, the board movable decorative member 14R is hidden on the right side of the screen in the initial state, and by moving diagonally upward to the left toward the center of the screen, it appears in the front side of the screen. Such drive (operation) of the board movable decorative member 14 increases the player's sense of anticipation for winning. The effect of driving (moving) the board movable decorative member 14 is also called "board movable effect", and the above-mentioned "frame movable effect" and "board movable effect" are also collectively called "movable effect".

Here, the image display devices (the image display devices 71 and 72) capable of performing display effects by displaying various effect images according to the game situation are also called "display effect means". In addition, the frame movable decorative member 13 and the board movable decorative member 14 that can perform movable effects by operating in accordance with the game effects are also referred to as "frame movable effect means" and "board movable effect means", respectively. Further, the frame movable effect means and the board movable effect means are also collectively referred to as "movable effect means". In addition to the movable decorative member, for example, when the effect button 63 moves up and down, vibrates, or the like with the game effect, the effect button 63 can also be said to be "movable effect means". In addition, the speaker 67 capable of performing sound production by emitting various sounds (sound effects) according to the game situation is also referred to as "sound production means", and emits various lights according to the game situation. The board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 (light emitting member) that can perform light emission effects by emitting light are also called "light effect means". In addition to the board surface lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66, for example, the production button 63 and the firing handle 60 have built-in light emitting members (other lamps) such as LEDs. When performing light emitting effects such as lighting and blinking, the effect button 63 and the firing handle 60 can also be said to be "light effect means". Furthermore, these "display effect means", "frame movable effect means", "board movable effect means", "sound effect means" and "light effect means" are also collectively referred to as "effect means".

In the lower center of the game area 3 (below the lower image display device 71), there is a non-variable first starting hole 20 that does not change the ease with which a game ball enters (the size of the game ball receiving hole). A winning device 19 (also referred to as a "non-variable starter") is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, a random number for special symbol suitability determination is acquired, and when a predetermined condition is established, the suitability determination related to the first special symbol (first special symbol suitability Judgment) is executed, and the first special symbol is variably displayed, and is stopped and displayed based on the result of the success/failure determination.

Below the first starting port 20, a variable winning device 22 (“variable starting port”) is provided with a variable second starting port 21 that changes the ease with which a game ball enters (the size of the game ball receiving port). ) is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, a random number for special symbol suitability determination is acquired, and when a predetermined condition is established, the suitability determination of the second special symbol (second special symbol suitability determination ) is executed, the second special symbol is variably displayed, and is stop-displayed based on the result of the win/loss determination.

The variable winning device 22 has a movable member 23 and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23 . By this opening and closing operation, the second starting port 21 can change from the first mode (closed state) to the second mode (open state) in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than that in the first mode. be. In other words, the movable member 23 changes the possibility of a game ball entering the second starting port 21 by performing a predetermined operation (opening/closing operation). This movable member 23 is driven by a second starting solenoid 24 (see FIG. 5). In this embodiment, the second starting port 21 allows game balls to enter only when the movable member 23 is in an open state, and disables game balls to enter when the movable member 23 is in a closed state. . In addition, if the second starting port 21 is such that the game ball is more difficult to enter when the movable member 23 is in the closed state than when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, it is completely closed when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. It does not have to be something that makes it impossible to enter the ball.

A first big winning device 31 having a first big winning hole 30 (also referred to as a "first variable ball entrance") is provided on the right side of the first starting hole 20 in the game area 3 (right game area 3R). It is The first big prize winning device 31 has an opening/closing member 32 and opens and closes the first big prize winning port 30 by operating the opening/closing member 32 . The opening/closing member 32 is driven by a first big winning opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 5). A game ball can enter the first big winning hole 30 only when the opening/closing member 32 is in an open state. That is, the first big winning device 31 can enter a ball-unable state (closed state) in which a game ball cannot be entered and a ball-enterable state (open state) in which a game ball can be entered by the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing member 32. can be changed to

In addition, a second big winning device 36 having a second big winning hole 35 (also referred to as a "second variable ball entry hole") is provided on the upper right (right gaming region 3R) of the first big winning hole 30 in the game area 3. is provided. The second big prize winning device 36 has an opening/closing member (wing member) 37 that can rotate in the left-right direction (horizontal direction). The opening/closing member 37 is driven by a second big prize winning solenoid 38 (see FIG. 5). A game ball can enter the second big winning hole 35 only when the opening/closing member 37 is in an open state. That is, the second big winning device 36 can enter a ball-unable state (closed state) in which a game ball cannot be entered and a ball-enterable state (open state) in which a game ball can be entered by the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing member 37. can be changed to

The second big winning device 36 is formed with a specific area 39 through which a game ball entering the second big winning hole 35 can pass. In the pachinko game machine 1, a high probability state, which will be described later, is generated based on detection that at least one of the game balls entering the second big prize hole 35 has passed through the specific area 39. . That is, the specific area 39 is a probability variable operation opening. Such a specific area 39 is not provided in the first big winning device 31 . The second big winning opening 35 (second big winning device 36) having the specific area 39 (V area) as such a variable probability operating opening is also called "V attacker". It should be noted that the high probability state is one of the game benefits given to the player separately from the special game.

In addition, a gate 28 (game ball passage opening) through which game balls can pass is provided directly above the first big winning opening 30 in the game area 3 (right game area 3R). Based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28, a random number for determining whether or not the normal symbol is determined is acquired, and when a predetermined condition is established, a normal determination is made as to whether or not the second start port 21 is to be opened. While the symbol suitability determination is executed, the normal symbols are variably displayed, and are stopped and displayed based on the results of the normal symbol suitability determination. When the winning normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the second starting port 21 is opened. Furthermore, a plurality of general prize winning openings 27 are provided in the lower part of the game area 3 . In this embodiment, four general winning openings 27 are provided, three of which are left general winning openings provided to the left of the first starting opening 20 (left game area 3L), and one is the first opening. It is a right general winning opening provided on the right side of the big winning opening 30 (right game area 3R). The first starting hole 20, the second starting hole 21, the first big winning hole 30, the second big winning hole 35, and the general winning hole 27 are the ball entry holes that trigger the payout of prize balls. When a game ball enters the mouth, a predetermined number of game balls (prize balls) are paid out from each ball entrance. Specifically, the number of prize balls in the first start hole 20 is "4", the number of prize balls in the second start hole 21 is "2", and the number of prize balls in the first big prize hole 20 and the second big prize hole 35 is "15", and the number of prize balls in the general winning hole 27 is "10".

A game in which a plurality of entrances (first starting opening 20, second starting opening 21, first big winning opening 30, second big winning opening 35, general winning opening 27 and gate 28) are arranged in this way The area 3 can be divided into a left game area 3L (first area) on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction and a right game area 3R (second area) on the right side. Shooting a game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3L is called "left hitting", and shooting a game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 3R is called "right hitting". . Here, among the plurality of ball entrances, the first starting opening 20 and the three left general winning openings 27 are provided so that game balls flowing down the left game area 3L of the game area 3 can enter. The second starting port 21, the first big winning port 30, the second big winning port 35, the right general winning port 27, and the gate 28 are where game balls flowing down the right game area 3R of the game areas 3 enter. It is set up so that it is possible. In the pachinko game machine 1, when the game is started, in principle, the ball is aimed to enter the first start hole 20 by striking to the left. On the other hand, when the game state changes due to a hit in the win/loss determination based on the ball entering the first starting hole 20, in principle, the gate 28, the second starting hole 21, the first big winning hole 30, and the first winning hole 30 are hit to the right. The goal is to enter the ball into the second prize-winning hole 35 .

Further, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a main display 40 is arranged in the lower right part of the game board 2. As shown in FIG. The main display 40 includes a first special symbol display unit 41a (first special symbol display unit) that variably displays and statically displays the first special symbol, and a second special symbol that variably displays and statically displays the second special symbol. A display device 41b (second special symbol display portion) and a normal symbol display device 42 (normal symbol display portion) that variably display and stop display normal symbols are included. In addition, the main display 40 includes a first special symbol reservation display 43a that displays the number of memory of the right or wrong determination information (first special symbol reservation) related to the first special symbol, and the right or wrong determination information related to the second special symbol ( The second special figure reservation indicator 43b that displays the number of memories of the second special figure reservation) and the normal figure reservation indicator 44 that displays the number of memories of the operation reservation (normal figure reservation) of the normal design indicator 42 include. Further, the main display 40 includes a win indicator 48 indicating that the result of the first special symbol suitability determination or the second special symbol suitability determination is a hit, and the first special symbol suitability determination or the second special symbol suitability determination. A round indicator 45 indicating the number of rounds of the winning game to be executed when the result is a hit, a game state indicator 46 indicating that the probability variation function is activated, and the shooting direction of the game ball, that is, hitting right. and a firing direction indicator 47 that indicates whether the ball should be shot or left-handed. The display of these various displays included in the main display 40 is controlled by a main control section which will be described later.

The variable display of the first special symbol is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. - 特許庁The variable display of the second special symbol is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 . In the following description, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as "special symbol". Also, the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b may be collectively referred to as "special symbol display unit 41". Also, the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b may be collectively referred to as "special figure reservation display unit 43".

In the special symbol display unit 41, after the special symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time, it is stopped and displayed, and the ball is entered into the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 according to the stopped and displayed special symbol (stop symbol). The result of the lottery (special design success/failure determination, jackpot lottery) based on is notified. The special symbol to be stopped and displayed is one special symbol selected from among a plurality of types of special symbols by special symbol suitability determination. When the stop pattern is a predetermined specific special pattern (specific identification information), that is, the mode of the stop display of the special pattern (the display result of the variable display of the special pattern) is a hit mode such as a big hit pattern or a small hit pattern. In this case, a special game (big win game, small win game) is performed to open the first big winning hole 30 or the second big winning hole 35 in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of winning symbols stopped and displayed. The pattern of opening the big winning holes (the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole 35) in the special game will be described later.

The special symbols are stopped and displayed until a predetermined stop display time (fixed display time) elapses. Then, if the special symbol that is stopped and displayed is a lost symbol (outgoing mode, non-specific mode), and if the special symbol reservation is stored at the time of the stop display, when the stop display time elapses, the storage order The oldest (earliest) special symbol reservation is digested, and the next special symbol variable display is started. In addition, if the stopped special symbol is a missing symbol and the special symbol reservation is not stored at the time of the stop display, the stopped display state of the special symbol is maintained even after the stop display time elapses. be done. On the other hand, when the stopped special symbol is a winning symbol (a big winning symbol or a small winning symbol), when the stop display time elapses, the operation shifts to an opening period to be described later, and one round of the big winning game after the opening period. The first opening of the eye or the small winning game is started. Incidentally, the stop display time of the special symbols is generally set to "0.5 seconds to 1.0 seconds", and is set to "0.6 seconds" in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol display device 41a is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "ip", and displays a special symbol according to the result of the first special symbol suitability determination. In this embodiment, as a result of the first special symbol suitability determination, four types of jackpots, namely, "15R 1st jackpot", "15R 2nd jackpot", "5R 3rd jackpot" and "2R 4th jackpot", and 1st Small hits are provided (see FIGS. 6 and 8), and the LEDs of the first special symbol display 41a can take display modes corresponding to the big hits and the small hits. For example, when the result of the first special symbol suitability determination is the first jackpot (15R jackpot), three LEDs of "ijn" are lit and the rest are turned off (15R first jackpot pattern). Also, when the second big win (15R big win) occurs, the three LEDs of "ijk" are turned on and the rest are turned off (15R second big win pattern). Also, when the third big win (15R big win) occurs, the three LEDs of "ijl" are turned on and the rest are turned off (15R third big win pattern). Also, when the fourth big win (2R big win) is achieved, four LEDs of "jnop" are turned on and the rest are turned off (2R fourth big win pattern). Further, when the first small hit is achieved, four LEDs of "mnop" are lit and the rest are turned off (small hit pattern). Also, when it is out, two LEDs of "lo" are turned on and the rest are extinguished (outgoing pattern).

On the other hand, the second special symbol display 41b is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "ah", and displays a special symbol according to the result of the second special symbol suitability determination. In this embodiment, two types of big hits, "15R 5th big win" and "15R 6th big win" are provided as a result of the second special symbol suitability determination (see FIG. 8), and the second special symbol display. The LED of the device 41b can take a display form corresponding to each of the big hits. For example, when the result of the second special symbol propriety determination is the fifth big hit (15R big win), three LEDs of "abd" are lit and the rest are turned off (15R fifth big win pattern). Also, when the 6th jackpot (15R jackpot) is achieved, the three LEDs of "abc" are lit and the rest are turned off (15R 6th jackpot pattern). Further, when the second small hit is achieved, the four LEDs of "cdeh" are turned on and the rest are turned off (second small prize pattern). Also, when it is out, two LEDs of "eh" are turned on and the rest are extinguished (outgoing symbol).

It should be noted that the special symbol stop display mode (stop symbol) is not limited to these, and can be arbitrarily set. In addition, before the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the special symbols are variably displayed for a predetermined variable time. Thus, each LED can be turned on.

In this pachinko game machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, various information ("acquired information") such as a random number for judging whether or not a special symbol Also referred to as) is acquired, and the acquired various information is temporarily stored in a special figure reservation storage unit (not shown) formed in the RAM of the main control unit. Specifically, if the ball is entered into the first start port 20, it is stored as the first special figure reservation (first acquisition information) in the first special figure reservation storage unit (not shown), and to the second start port 21 If it is a ball entry, it is stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit (not shown) as the second special figure reservation (second acquisition information). The number of special figure suspension (acquisition information) that can be stored in each special figure suspension storage unit is up to a predetermined number, and the upper limit value in the present embodiment is "4" respectively. These first special figure reservation storage unit and second special figure reservation storage unit are also referred to as "first acquisition information storage means" and "second acquisition information storage means", respectively, and are generally referred to as "acquisition information storage means".

The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage part is consumed when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. Digestion of the special figure reservation means to determine the special symbol suitability determination random number etc. corresponding to the special figure reservation, and execute the variable display of the special symbol for showing the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1, when the variation display of the special symbols based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 cannot be immediately executed at the time of the entry, that is, the variation of the special symbols Even when the display is being executed or the special game is being executed, it is possible to reserve the right to judge whether or not the special symbol is appropriate for the entered ball, with a predetermined number as the upper limit.

The number of special figure reservations stored in the special figure reservation storage unit is displayed on the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b. Specifically, the first special figure reservation indicator 43a is composed of two LEDs of "uv", and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the first special figure reservations, the first special figure It displays the number of pending. For example, if the number of holds is "0", the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "u □ v □" (for example, □: lights off, ●: lights up in red, ▲: lights up in green). is "1", the "u" LED is extinguished and the "v" LED is lit in red, such as "u v". v□”, the “u” LED is lit in red and the “v” LED is turned off. It is possible to set the display mode to light up in red, and to light up both LEDs in green, such as "u▲v▲" when the number of reservations is "4 (upper limit number)".

In addition, the second special figure reservation indicator 43b is composed of two LEDs of "wx", and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of second special figure reservations, the number of second special figure reservations is displayed. For example, if the number of holds is "0", the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "w □ x □" (for example, □: lights off, ●: lights up in red, ▲: lights up in green). "1" to "4" are also defined in the same manner as the first special figure reservation display 43a.

The variable display of normal symbols is performed with the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 as a trigger. In the normal symbol display device 42, after the normal symbols are variably displayed for a predetermined period of time, the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, and the result of normal symbol propriety determination based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 is displayed by the stopped and displayed normal symbols (stop symbols). inform. The normal symbol to be stopped and displayed is one normal symbol selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols by the normal symbol propriety determination. When the stop-displayed normal symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (hit normal symbol), an auxiliary game is performed to open the second starting port 21 in an opening pattern according to the current game state. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol display device 42 is composed of two LEDs of "st", and normally displays the normal symbol corresponding to the result of the normal symbol propriety determination by its lighting mode. is. For example, when the judgment result is a hit, the win normal symbol with both LEDs lit up is stopped and displayed, such as "st■" (for example, ▪: lights up, □: lights out). In addition, when the judgment result is out, the out normal symbol is displayed such that only the LED of "t" lights up, such as "s□t■". It should be noted that the normal design is not a specific normal design. Before the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, the variable display of the normal symbols is executed over a predetermined variable time. be.

In this pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the gate 28, various information (also called "acquired information") such as a random number for judging whether a normal symbol is right or wrong is acquired based on the passage of the game ball. is temporarily stored as a normal map reservation in a normal map reservation storage unit (not shown) formed in the RAM of the main control unit. The number of normal pattern reservations that can be stored in the general pattern reservation storage unit is up to a predetermined number, and the upper limit value in the present embodiment is "4". The general pattern reservation stored in the general pattern reservation storage unit is digested when the variable display of the normal pattern based on the normal pattern reservation becomes possible. Digestion of the normal pattern reservation means to determine the random number for determining whether the normal pattern is appropriate or not corresponding to the normal pattern reservation, and to execute the variable display of the normal pattern to show the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1, when the variable display of the normal symbols based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 cannot be immediately executed when the game ball passes through the gate 28, that is, when the variable display of the normal symbols is being executed or the auxiliary game is being executed. Even so, it is possible to reserve the right of normal symbol propriety judgment for the passage, with a predetermined number as the upper limit.

The number of normal pattern reservations stored in the general pattern reservation storage unit is displayed on the general pattern reservation display 44 . Specifically, the normal map hold indicator 44 is composed of two LEDs of "qr", and displays the number of normal map reservations by lighting the LEDs according to the number of normal map reservations. be. For example, if the number of holds is "0", the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "q □ r □" (for example, □: lights off, ●: lights up in red, ▲: lights up in green). is "1", the LED of "q" is extinguished and the LED of "r" is turned on in red, such as "q□r●". In addition, the number of reservations "2" to "4" are also defined in the same manner as the first special figure reservation display 43a.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 5. FIG. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control board 80 (also known as a "main control unit", which performs control related to game progress and game profit, such as special symbol success/failure determination, normal symbol success/failure determination, game state transition, etc.). section"), a sub-control board 90 (also referred to as a "sub-control section", also referred to as a "production control section") that controls the performance to be executed as the game progresses, payout control that controls the payout of game balls It includes a substrate 110 (also referred to as a “payout control unit”), an image control substrate 100 (image control unit) that performs display control of the image display devices 71 and 72, and the like.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, a main control board housing case containing a main control board 80 is provided substantially in the center of the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, and above the main control board case is a voice control board. An image control board housing case containing the board 106, the lamp control board 107 and the image control board 100 is provided, and a sub control board housing case housing the sub control board 90 is provided above the image control board housing case. ing. In addition, a payout control board case for housing a payout control board is provided on the lower left side of the main control board case, and a power board case for housing the power board 109 is provided on the right side thereof. The power supply board 109 receives power supplied from the outside and supplies power to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Specifically, various boards, devices and equipment shown in the block diagram of FIG. Power is supplied to various electric parts necessary for the operation of the pachinko game machine 1, such as sensors, switches, motors, and solenoids. The power supply board 109 is also called "power supply means".

The main control board 80 is mounted with a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as "game control microcomputer") 81 for controlling the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM storing programs for controlling the progress of the game, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU executing the programs stored in the ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits and receives data (information) to and from other boards and the like via an input/output circuit 87 (I/O port section). The input/output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81 . Also, the ROM may be externally attached. The RAM of the game control microcomputer 81 is provided with the above-described special figure reservation storage unit (first special figure reservation storage unit and second special figure reservation storage unit) and normal figure reservation storage unit. In addition, at a predetermined address of the RAM (main control RAM) of the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81), storage areas for use in various flags and various counters are secured.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via a relay board 88 . Therefore, a signal is input to the main control board 80 from each sensor, and a signal is output from the main control board 80 to each solenoid. Specifically, the sensors include the first starting opening sensor 20a, the second starting opening sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the first big winning opening sensor 30a, the second big winning opening sensor 35a, the specific area sensor 39a, and the non-specific sensor. A region sensor 49a and a general winning hole sensor 27a are connected. These various sensors are also called "game ball detection means".

The first starting hole sensor 20a is provided in the first starting hole 20 and detects a game ball entering the first starting hole 20. As shown in FIG. The second starting hole sensor 21a is provided in the second starting hole 21 and detects a game ball entering the second starting hole 21 . The gate sensor 28a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. As shown in FIG. The first big winning hole sensor 30 a is provided in the first big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball entering the first big winning hole 30 . The second big winning hole sensor 35a is provided in the second big winning hole 35 and detects a game ball entering the second big winning hole 35 . The specific area sensor 39 a is provided in the specific area 39 inside the second big winning hole 35 and detects a game ball that has passed through the specific area 39 . The non-specific area sensor 49a is provided in a non-specific area (not shown) in the second large winning opening 35, and the game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 35 passes through the non-specific area. A ball (that is, a game ball that did not pass through the specific area 39) is detected. The general winning hole sensor 27 a is provided in each general winning hole 27 and detects a game ball entering the general winning hole 27 .

As the solenoids, the second starting solenoid 24, the first big winning solenoid 33 and the second big winning solenoid 38 are connected. The second starting solenoid 24 is for driving the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22 . The first big prize opening solenoid 33 is for driving the opening/closing member 32 of the first big prize winning device 31 . The second big winning opening solenoid 38 is for driving the opening/closing member 37 of the second big winning device 36 .

Furthermore, the main control board 80 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol suspension display 43a, a second special symbol suspension display 43b, and a general symbol. A holding indicator 44, a round indicator 45, a game state indicator 46, a shooting direction indicator 47 and a win indicator 48 are connected. That is, the display control of these main display devices 40 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81 .

In addition, the main control board 80 mainly transmits commands related to the payout of prize balls (prize ball payout command, etc.) to the payout control board 110, and various commands related to payout monitoring from the payout control board 110 (payout abnormality detection command, etc.). ). That is, the main control board 80 and the payout control board 110 are connected so as to be capable of two-way communication. The payout control board 110 includes a payout device 120 that pays out prize balls and rental balls, and a card unit 135 (installed adjacent to the pachinko game machine 1 and stored in an inserted prepaid card (game value storage medium) or the like). (which enables ball rental based on the information received) is connected, and a launcher 112 is connected via a launch control board 111 (also referred to as a "launch control unit"). Firing device 112 includes a firing handle 60 (see FIG. 1). When the player operates the handle 60 of the shooting device 112 , the touch switch 114 detects the player's contact with the shooting handle 60 , and the shooting volume 115 detects the amount of rotation of the shooting handle 60 . Then, the shooting motor 113 is driven and controlled so that the game ball is shot with strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the shooting volume 115 . In this embodiment, the number of game balls that can be continuously shot by the shooting device 112 by driving the shooting motor 113 is about 100 in one minute.

The payout control board 110 is mounted with a payout control one-chip microcomputer 116 (also referred to as “payout control microcomputer”) for controlling the payout of game balls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The payout control microcomputer 116 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the payout of game balls, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes the programs stored in the ROM. The payout control microcomputer 116 controls the payout device 120 based on a signal (prize ball payout command) from the main control board 80 and a signal from the card unit 135 via the input/output circuit 117 (I/O port section). A payout motor 121 (electric drive source) is driven to pay out prize balls or rental balls. The game balls to be paid out are detected by a payout sensor 122 (detection means) for counting. The input/output circuit 117 may be built in the payout control microcomputer 116, and the ROM may be externally attached. The payout control board 110 is also connected to the lower tray full sensor 62a and the out-of-ball sensor 152 (see FIG. 5). The lower tray full sensor 62a detects when the lower tray 62 is filled with a large number of game balls, and the game ball passage ( not shown) is provided in the vicinity of the lower plate 62 side. The out-of-ball sensor 152 is provided in the gutter member 151 to detect that the game balls supplied to the payout device 120 are insufficient (hereinafter also referred to as "out-of-ball state"). .

Here, the outline of the dispensing device 120 and the gutter member 151 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. The dispensing device 120 (dispensing means) is mainly constructed by accommodating a dispensing motor 121 (electric driving source) in a device case 125 and covering it with a cover member 124 (see FIG. 2). 55 and 56 show the inside of the dispensing device 120 (device case 125) with the cover member 124 removed. A payout motor 121 is accommodated in a predetermined accommodation portion of the device case 125 , and a screw 123 for ball feed is assembled to the rotary shaft (drive shaft) of the payout motor 121 . In addition, the device case 125 includes a ball passage 126 through which game balls to be paid out as prize balls or rental balls can flow down, a receiving port 127 for receiving game balls from the gutter member 151 into the ball passage 126, and a discharged ball. A discharge port 128 for discharging game balls to the outside of the payout device (outside the device case) is integrally formed over the top and bottom, and a payout sensor 122 is provided in the vicinity of the discharge port 128 . The payout motor 121 is composed of a stepping motor, and the drive control of the payout motor 121 is performed under the control of the payout control section via a drive circuit (stepping motor driver circuit) not shown. When the payout motor 121 is stopped, a part of the screw 123 protrudes to the ball passage 126 side, so that the game ball cannot flow down inside the ball passage 126.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the payout motor 121 rotates, the screw 123 attached to the rotating shaft also rotates, and the game balls in the ball passage 126 are sent downward and discharged from the discharge port 128 accordingly. This ejected (paid out) game ball is detected by the payout sensor 122 and paid out to the upper tray 61 or the lower tray 62 . In addition, the game ball flows down inside the gutter member 151 as the game ball is paid out (discharged) by the payout device 120 . On the other hand, the gutter member 151 is configured by covering a gutter main body 151A in which a ball passage 153 is formed with a gutter cover 151B (see FIG. 2). FIG. 56 shows the inside of the gutter member 151 (the gutter main body 151A) with the gutter cover 151B removed. A ball passage 153 for guiding game balls supplied from the ball tank 150 to the payout device 120 side is integrally formed in the gutter main body 151A in the vertical direction. The upstream opening of the ball passage 153 serves as an inflow port into which game balls supplied from the ball tank 150 (see FIG. 2) flow in, and the downstream opening thereof is connected to the receiving port 127 of the payout device 120. ing. A ball running out sensor 152 and a detection piece 154 are provided at substantially the middle portion in the vertical direction of the ball passage 153, and when the game balls in the ball passage 153 run short and there are no game balls in the middle portion, a detection is made. The piece 154 tilts toward the ball passage 153 and leaves the detection range (detection area) of the blown ball sensor 152, whereby the blown ball state is detected.

Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub-control board 90 . The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only transmission of signals from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90 . That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) is interposed as communication direction control means.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the sub-control board 90 is mounted with an effect control one-chip microcomputer 91 ("effect control microcomputer") for controlling the effect of the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program. The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM that stores programs and the like for controlling effects as the game progresses, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes the programs stored in the ROM. . The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits and receives data to and from other boards and the like via an input/output circuit 95 (I/O port section). The input/output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91 . Also, the ROM may be externally attached. In addition, at a predetermined address of the RAM (effect control RAM) of the sub-control board 90 (effect control microcomputer 91), a storage area for use in various flags and various counters is secured.

An image control board 100 , an audio control board 106 and a lamp control board 107 are connected to the sub-control board 90 . The sub-control board 90 (sub-control section), the image control board 100 (image control section), the sound control board 106 (sound control section), and the lamp control board 107 (lamp control section) display according to the game situation. It functions as an effect execution means for causing corresponding devices and members (electrical parts, effect means) to execute various effects such as effects, sound effects, and lamp effects (light effects). In addition, various advance notice effects (suggestion effects) suggesting information on the variable display of identification information (special patterns and effect patterns) are executed by the corresponding production devices and members (electric parts, effect means). It also functions as a means of execution.

Here, the notice effect is, for example, the possibility that the display result of the variable display will be a big hit (reliability, expectation), whether or not the ready-to-win effect is executed (feasibility), and the display result of the variable display and the display result. It refers to a production (suggestive production) that suggests in advance information related to the process leading up to the derivation display of . The notice effect is roughly divided into the notice effect related to the suspension based on the preliminary determination result of the suspension of the special pattern, and the notice effect related to the variable display (variation effect) being executed. The latter is also referred to as "the relevant change notice". In this embodiment, it is possible to execute both of these advance notice effects.

The effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub control board 90, based on the command received from the main control board 80, to the CPU of the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 ("image control microcomputer") of the image control board 100, the lower image Display control of the display device 71 and the upper image display device 72 is performed. The RAM of the image control board 100 (image control microcomputer 101) is a memory for developing image data. In the ROM of the image control board 100 (image control microcomputer 101), still image data and moving image data to be displayed on the image display devices 71 and 72, specifically characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. ( image data such as production patterns, reserved patterns, etc.) and background images are stored. The image control microcomputer 101 reads out image data from the ROM based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91 . Then, display control is executed based on the read image data. A VDP (Video Display Processor) may be provided in place of or in addition to the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 of the image control board 100 .

Also, the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs sounds, music, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 67 via the sound control board 106 based on commands received from the main control board 80 . Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90 . A CPU may be mounted on the audio control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may be caused to execute audio control. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the audio control board 106, and acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. Also, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100 to cause the image control microcomputer 101 to perform voice control. Furthermore, in this case, the sound data may be stored in the ROM of the image control board 100 .

Furthermore, the effect control microcomputer 91, based on the command received from the main control board 80, the light emission pattern data (data for deciding on/off, emission color, etc.) that determines the light emission mode of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board surface lamp 5 , lamp data) is determined from the data stored in the ROM, and lighting control of lamps (LEDs) such as the frame lamp 66 and the board surface lamp 5 is performed via the lamp control board 107 .

In addition, the performance control microcomputer 91 operates the frame movable decorative member 13 and the board movable decorative member 14 connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108 based on the command received from the main control board 80. As described above, the movable frame decorative member 13 is provided on the front frame 51, and the movable board decorative member 14 is provided on the center decorative body 10, which are movable so-called gimmicks. The movable frame decorative member 13 is also called a "movable frame accessory", and the movable board decorative member 14 is also called a "movable board accessory". The decorative member 14 (movable board accessory) is also generally called a “movable decorative member” or a “movable accessory”.

The effect control microcomputer 91 stores drive pattern data (also referred to as "drive data") for driving (operating) the movable decorative members (frame movable decorative member 13, board movable decorative member 14) in a predetermined drive mode (operation mode). ) are determined from the data stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90, and drive control of the movable decorative member is performed via the lamp control board 107 and the relay board . A CPU may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and in this case, the CPU may be caused to control lighting of the lamp (LED drive control) and drive control of the movable decorative member. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and data relating to light emission patterns and driving patterns may be stored in the ROM.

Also, the sub-control board 90 includes a first effect button detection switch 63c and a second 2 effect button detection switch 63d is connected. Therefore, when the player performs a predetermined input operation on the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b, a signal is output to the sub-control board 90 from the corresponding effect button detection switch. Incidentally, the first effect button detection switch 63c and the second effect button detection switch 63d are collectively referred to simply as "effect button detection switch".

Here, the sub-control board 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91) functions as a "drive control means" that controls the driving of the electric parts for effect such as the movable decorative members 13 and 14, the board lamp 5, and the frame lamp 66. It is a thing. In addition, the image control board 100 (image control microcomputer 101) functions as a "drive control means" that controls the driving of the image display devices 71 and 72 (a kind of electric parts for presentation).

Next, the control (determining means) relating to the winning/losing determination in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. As a result of the special symbol propriety determination, there are "big hit", "minor hit", and "off". When the result of the special symbol propriety determination is "big hit", the "big hit pattern" is stop-displayed on the special pattern display part 41, and when the result is "small win", the special pattern display part 41 is stop-displayed on the "small win pattern". , "missing", the special symbol display portion 41 stops displaying the "missing symbol". When it is determined as a big win or a small win, a "special game" is executed to open the first big winning hole 30 or the second big winning hole 35 in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the special symbols stopped and displayed. . A special game executed as a big win is called a "big win game", and a special game executed as a small win is called a "small win game".

There are multiple types of hits. As shown in FIG. 6, the types of jackpots are "15R (round) 1st jackpot", "15R 2nd jackpot", "15R 3rd jackpot", "2R 4th jackpot", "15R 5th jackpot" and There is a "15R 6th jackpot". In the "15R 1st jackpot" and "15R 5th jackpot", the number of openings (number of rounds) of the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30 or 2nd big winning opening 35) is 15 times. In the second round, it is a big hit that opens the second big winning hole 35 in a manner that allows (easy) passage of the game ball to the specific area 39 (V passage). The round aiming at passing the game ball to the specific area 39 is also called "V round" or "chance round".

"15R 2nd jackpot", "15R 3rd jackpot" and "15R 6th jackpot" are opened 15 times (number of rounds) of the big prize gate (first big prize gate 30 or second big prize gate 35). However, the opening times of the first and second rounds, which are the V rounds, are extremely short (instantaneous opening and closing), and it is difficult (or even impossible) for the game ball to pass through the specific area 39. is. In other words, these big wins can be said to be big wins that do not open the second big winning hole 35 in a manner in which the game ball can (easily) pass through the specific area 39 .

"2R 4th jackpot" is that the number of openings (number of rounds) of the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30 or second big winning opening 35) is 2 times, and the 1st and 2nd rounds are V rounds. It is a big hit that opens the second big winning hole 35 in such a manner that the game ball can pass to the specific area 39 immediately. However, since the opening time of the second big winning hole 35 is 1.8 seconds even in the first round and the second round combined, the probability of the game ball passing through the specific area is lower than in the 15R first big win. It's becoming

In the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, based on the passage of the game ball to the specific area 39 during the big win game, the game state after the big win game is completed is shifted to the high probability state described later. Therefore, when the result of the special symbol propriety determination is the 15R first big hit or the 15R fifth big hit, V in the first and second rounds is performed in a manner in which the possibility of the game ball passing through the specific area 39 is extremely high. Since the round is executed, the game state after the big win game can be shifted to the high probability state by allowing the game ball to pass through the specific area 39 during the execution of the big win game. In addition, when the result of the special symbol suitability determination is the 2R fourth big hit, one round is performed in a mode in which there is a possibility that the game ball may pass through the specific area 39 although it is not as good as the 15R first big hit or the 15R fifth big hit. Since the second and second V rounds are executed, if the game ball can pass through the specific area 39 during execution of the big win game, the game state after the big win game can be shifted to a high probability state. .

On the other hand, when the result of special symbol suitability determination is 15R 2nd jackpot, 15R 3rd jackpot or 15R 6th jackpot, opening times of V rounds of 1st round and 2nd round are 0.00. Since it is 1 second, it is very difficult to let the game ball enter the second big winning hole. It becomes substantially impossible), and the game state after the jackpot game is very likely to be a normal state (low probability state) described later (it can be said to be a low probability state).

On the other hand, a small win (first small win, second small win) is a win to open a big winning hole (second big winning hole 35) in the same opening pattern as the 2R fourth big win. That is, in the small hit, the second big winning hole 35 is opened in such a manner that the game ball can pass through the specific area 39 . However, even if the game ball passes through the specific area 39 during execution of the small-hit game, the game state after execution of the small-hit game does not change from before execution of the small-hit game. Therefore, if the game state before execution of the small-hit game is a normal state (low probability state), the game state after execution of the small-hit game will also be in a normal state. From the player's point of view, the 2R fourth big win and the small win cannot be distinguished even by looking at the opening pattern of the big winning hole (second big winning hole 35). That is, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the result of the special symbol success/failure determination is the "2R fourth big win" or the "minor win". Therefore, even if the game ball passes through the specific area 39 during the special game (during the jackpot game) as the 2R fourth jackpot, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the subsequent game state has shifted to the high probability state. Have difficulty. In addition, even if the game ball passes through the specific area 39 during the special game as a small win (during the small win game), that alone determines whether the subsequent game state remains the normal state or shifts to the high probability state. It is difficult to recognize. As a result, the player can proceed with the game with expectation that a high probability state may be reached in the case of a small win or in the case of a 2R fourth big win, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced. . It should be noted that, in the case of a small win, the number of openings of the big winning opening is not called the number of rounds, but simply called the number of openings.

FIG. 6 shows the opening patterns of the big winning openings when each big win and small win are achieved in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment. That is, when it becomes the 15R first big hit (when the 15R first big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a) and when it becomes the 15R fifth big hit (15R on the second special symbol display 41b) When the fifth big winning pattern is stopped and displayed), the second big winning opening 35 is opened for maximum 28 seconds in 1R to 2R, and the first big winning opening 30 is opened for maximum 28 seconds in 3R to 15R. In this hit, since the opening time of the second big winning hole 35 in the 1st round and the 2nd round is 28 seconds respectively, the possibility of the game ball passing through the specific area 39 during the round (during the V round) is extremely high. It has become.

Also, when it becomes a 15R second big hit (when the 15R second big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a), when it becomes a 15R third big hit (on the first special symbol display 41a When the 15R 3rd jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed) and when it becomes the 15R 6th jackpot (when the 15R 6th jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed on the second special pattern display 41b), in 1R to 2R The second big winning hole 35 is opened for 0.1 second at maximum, and the first big winning hole 30 is opened for 28 seconds at maximum from 3R to 15R. In this hit, the opening time of the second big winning opening 35 in the 1st round and the 2nd round is 0.1 seconds at the maximum, which is extremely short time (momentary opening and closing), so that the game can be played during the round (during the V round). It is almost impossible for the sphere to pass through the specific area 39 .

Thus, in this embodiment, compared with the opening patterns for the 15R second, third and sixth jackpots and the opening patterns for the 15R first and fifth jackpots, the first round and the second round (V round) are different in opening mode. In the 15R 1st and 5th jackpots, the second big prize-winning port 35 is opened for 28 seconds in the 1st and 2nd rounds, so that in the V-round, troubles such as ball clogging and game ball shooting system do not occur. As long as it is possible, the game ball will almost certainly enter the second big winning hole 35 and pass through the specific area 39 with a high probability. On the other hand, in the 15R 2nd, 3rd and 6th jackpots, the second big prize opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds in the first and second rounds. Therefore, it is very difficult for a game ball to enter the second big winning hole 35 . Therefore, the possibility of the game ball passing through the specific area 39 during the execution of the jackpot games related to the 15R 2nd, 3rd and 6th jackpots is considerably lower than that of the 15R 1st and 5th jackpots. It can be said that it is practically impassable.

A jackpot in which the V round is executed in a manner in which the possibility of the game ball passing through the specific area 39 (V passing possibility) is extremely high is also called a "V passing scheduled jackpot", and the V passing possibility is extremely low. A jackpot in which V rounds are executed in the mode is also referred to as a "V non-passing scheduled jackpot".

In addition, as shown in FIG. 6, when the 2R fourth big win is achieved (when the 2R fourth big win symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a), the second big winning openings from 1R to 2R 35 is opened for a maximum of 0.9 seconds. In this hit, the maximum total opening time of the second big winning hole 35 for the 1st round and the 2nd round is 1.8 seconds. It is possible to pass through the specific area 39 . In the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, one game ball is shot in about 0.6 seconds, so if the opening time of the second big winning hole 35 is 1.8 seconds, , it is sufficiently possible to enter the game ball into the second big winning hole 35 and aim for the game ball to pass through the specific area 39 . However, in the 2R 4th jackpot, the total opening time of the 2nd jackpot is as short as 1.8 seconds, so many prize balls (gaming profits) cannot be expected as in the other 15R jackpots. That is, it is a jackpot in which almost no prize balls can be obtained compared to other jackpots.

In addition, when it becomes the first small hit (when the first small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 41a), when it becomes the second small hit (when the second special symbol display device 41b When the second small winning symbol is stopped and displayed), the second big winning opening 35 is opened twice for a maximum of 0.9 seconds. That is, the big winning opening is opened in the same opening pattern as the 2R fourth big win. Even in this small hit, since the opening time of the second big winning hole 35 is 1.8 seconds in total, it is possible to let the game ball enter the second big winning hole 35 and pass through the specific area 39. there is However, as described above, even if there is passage to the specific area 39 in the small winning game, there is no change in the game state before and after the small winning game. Also, in the small winning game, since the total opening time of the big winning opening is as short as 1.8 seconds, many winning balls cannot be expected like the 2R fourth big winning. In other words, the small hit has almost no benefits for the player in terms of the transition of the game state and the prize ball (only the prize ball by entering the ball).

In this embodiment, as the opening pattern of the second big winning hole 35, the first opening pattern in which the game ball can pass through the specific area 39 (easily pass through) (15th first jackpot, 15R fifth jackpot), is a second opening pattern that makes it difficult (impossible to pass) through the specific area 39 (15R second jackpot, 15R third jackpot, 15R sixth jackpot), and the first opening that allows the game ball to pass through the specific area It can have a third open pattern (2R fourth jackpot) with a lower passability than the pattern. In addition, as an opening pattern for a small hit, there is a fourth opening pattern in which the game ball can pass through the specific area 39 but does not give a privilege (does not generate a high probability state) even if it passes through. can do. As another aspect, this fourth open pattern may be an open pattern that cannot pass through the specific area 39 .

In addition, the distribution probability to each jackpot in the judgment of the first special pattern (special drawing 1) is 40% for the 15R first jackpot, 20% for the 15R second jackpot, 30% for the 15R third jackpot, and 30% for the 2Rth jackpot. 4 jackpots are 10% (see the column of random numbers for jackpot type determination in FIG. 6). On the other hand, the big hits in the success/failure determination of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are 80% for the 5th big hit on the 15R and 20% for the 6th big hit on the 15R. column). This distribution probability can be said to represent the possibility of the game ball passing through the specific area 39 during the jackpot game, that is, the probability of being in a high probability state. It can be said that it represents the probability of becoming

That is, with respect to the probability of becoming a high probability state, if the success judgment (first special symbol success judgment) based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 results in a big hit, the probability is at least 40%. Including the case where the game ball passes through the specific area 39 during the jackpot game related to the 2R fourth jackpot, the probability is 50%. On the other hand, if the winning judgment (second special symbol winning judgment) based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 results in a big hit, the probability is 80%.

In addition, regarding the probability of becoming a high base state, if the game state (low base state) in which the opening extension function is not activated, the probability is 60% when the first special symbol success/failure determination results in a big hit. The probability is 70% including the 2R fourth jackpot when the first special symbol propriety determination results in a jackpot in the high base state. On the other hand, when the second special symbol propriety determination results in a big hit, the probability is 100%. When a big win is achieved in the second special symbol suitability determination, the 2R big win that can occur when the first special symbol suitability determination results in a big win does not occur, and the 15R big win is always achieved.

Thus, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, rather than becoming a big hit in the first special symbol propriety determination (first special symbol jackpot lottery) performed when the game ball enters the first start port 20, In the second special symbol success/failure determination (second special symbol big hit lottery) performed by the game ball entering the second starting port 21, the big hit is compared to the case of the first special symbol success/failure determination. , the probability of being in a high probability state, the probability of being in a high base state, and the possibility of winning prize balls for 15R are increased. In other words, it is set so that the possibility of winning a big hit in the second special symbol success/failure determination is more advantageous to the player than the case of a big hit in the first special symbol success/failure determination. There is a high possibility that variably displaying the second special symbol works more favorably for the player than variably displaying the first special symbol. Therefore, the player expects the ball to enter the second starting hole 21 and plays the game. This is particularly noticeable during the operation of the opening extension function (high base state) in which the frequency of ball entry into the second starting port 21 increases. Note that the distribution probability described above is an example, and can be arbitrarily set in consideration of game characteristics, specifications, and the like.

Also, in this embodiment, since the second special symbol is superior to the first special symbol, if both the first special symbol variable display and the second special symbol variable display are executable, that is, , If both the first special symbol reservation and the second special symbol reservation are "1" or more, the variation display of the second special symbol (digestion of the second special symbol reservation) is changed to the first special symbol variation display (second 1 digestion of special figure reservation) will be given priority. As a result, the high base state in which the frequency of ball entry into the second starting port 21 increases, the frequency of execution of the variable display of the second special symbol increases, so it can be said that the player can proceed with the game in an advantageous manner. In spite of this, the variable display of the first special symbol in the high base state hinders the player's ability to play the game in the advantageous state (high base state). Since the variable display of the first special symbol may work more disadvantageously than the variable display of the second special symbol, it can be said that the variable display of the first special symbol in the high base state is not desirable for the player.

Here, as the mode of the stop display of the special symbols, the big hit symbol is also called "specific mode" or "specific display result", and the small winning symbol is also called "predetermined mode" or "predetermined display result". The pattern is also called "non-specific mode" or "non-specific display result". In addition, the jackpot pattern (15R 3rd jackpot pattern, 2R 4th jackpot pattern in low base state) that does not trigger the setting of the high base state is also called "first specific mode" or "first specific display result". The "second specific mode" or "second Also referred to as “specific display result”. In addition, as a game state when the special symbols are variably displayed, the game state (low base state) in which the open extension function does not operate is also called a "first game state", and the game state in which the open extension function operates (high base state) state) is also referred to as a "second game state".

In this pachinko game machine 1, whether a big win, a small win, or a loss is determined based on a ``random number for judging the success or failure of a special symbol (also referred to as ``information for judging success or failure''). The determination of the type of is performed based on "random number for determining the type of jackpot (also referred to as "random number for design determination" and "information for design determination"). As shown in FIG. 7(A), the random number for judging whether or not the special symbol takes a value in the range of "0 to 629", and the random number for determining the jackpot type takes a value in the range of "0 to 99". In addition, the random number (acquired information) acquired based on the ball entering the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 includes "variation pattern random number (also referred to as “fluctuation pattern information”). The fluctuation pattern random number is a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern including fluctuation time, and takes a value in the range of "0 to 198". Random numbers obtained based on passage through the gate 28 include random numbers for normal symbol suitability determination shown in FIG. 7(B). The random number for determining whether or not the normal symbol is right or wrong is a random number for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 21 (normal symbol lottery), and takes a value in the range of "0 to 240".

Next, the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment will be described. The pachinko game machine 1 has a plurality of game states depending on combinations of the probability variation function for special symbols, the probability variation function for normal symbols, the variation time shortening function, and the open extension function in the operating state or non-operating state. ing. For special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol), the state in which the probability variation function is operating is called "high probability state", and the state in which it is not operating is called "normal state (also referred to as "low probability state"). ”. In the high-probability state, the probability of being determined as a big hit in the special symbol propriety determination is higher than in the normal state. That is, in the normal state, the success/failure determination is performed using the hit determination table for the normal state, and in the high-probability state, the value of the special symbol success/failure determination random number determined as the big hit is larger than the normal state. The decision table is used to determine whether or not the game is successful (see FIG. 8(A)). In other words, when the special pattern probability variation function is activated, the probability of the display result of the special symbol variation display becoming a big win (a stopped symbol becomes a big win pattern) is higher than when it is not activated.

In addition, the state in which the variable time reduction function is operating for the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is called "time saving state", and the state in which it is not operating is called "non-time saving state". In the time saving state, the average value of the special symbol variation time (the time from the start of the variable display to the time of the final display) is shorter than the average value of the special symbol variation time in the non-time saving state. That is, in the time saving state, the variation pattern is determined using a variation pattern table that is determined so that a variation pattern with a short variation time is selected more than in a non-time saving state (see FIG. 9) . As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure reservation becomes faster, and an effective entry into the starting port (an entry that can be remembered as a special figure reservation) is more likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game.

The probability variation function and the variation time shortening function for the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) may operate simultaneously, or only one of them may operate. Then, the probability variation function and the variation time shortening function for the normal symbols operate in synchronization with the variation time shortening function for the special symbols. That is, the normal symbol probability variation function and variation time reduction function operate in the time-saving state of the special symbol, and do not operate in the non-time-saving state. Therefore, in the time-saving state, the hit probability in normal design propriety determination is higher than the non-time-saving state. That is, the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) determined to be a hit is larger than the normal symbol per determination table used in the non-time saving state, using the normal symbol per determination table, normal symbol success determination (normal symbol determination) (See FIG. 8(C)). In other words, when the probability variation function for normal symbols is activated, the probability that the display result of variable display of normal symbols is a hit (a stopped symbol becomes a normal winning symbol) becomes higher than when it is not activated.

In addition, in the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal design is shorter than in the non-working time saving state. In this embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but is 1 second in the time saving state (see FIG. 8(D)). Furthermore, in the time saving state, the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) is activated, and the opening time of the second starting port 21 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time saving state. In addition, in the time saving state, the opening frequency increasing function of the variable winning device 22 is activated, and the opening frequency of the second starting port 21 in the auxiliary game is higher than in the non-time saving state. Specifically, when the result of the normal design propriety determination is hit in the non-time saving state, the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22 (second start port 21) performs 0.2 second opening operation once, and the time saving state When the result of the normal symbol propriety determination is hit, the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) performs an opening operation of 2.0 seconds three times.

Under the circumstances where the probability variation function and variation time reduction function for normal symbols, and the opening time extension function and the opening number increase function of the variable winning device 22 are operating, compared to the case where these functions are not operating As a result, the second starting port 21 is frequently opened, and the frequency of game balls entering the second starting port 21 increases (also referred to as "high frequency state"). As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of balls awarded to the number of balls fired, increases. Accordingly, the state in which these functions are activated is also referred to as the "high base state" and the state in which they are not activated is also referred to as the "low base state." In the high base state, it is possible to aim for a big hit without greatly reducing the number of game balls (holding balls) on hand.

A high base state (high frequency state) may not be one in which all of the above functions are activated. That is, by operating at least one of the probability variation function and variation time reduction function for normal symbols, and the opening time extension function and opening number increase function of the variable winning device 22, than when the function is not in operation It is sufficient that the second starting port 21 is easily opened (the frequency of ball entry is high). Also, the high base state may be controlled independently without accompanying the time saving state of the special symbol. A function for generating such a high base state can also be called a "high base generation function".

In the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game state after the end of the jackpot game in the case of the 15R first and fifth jackpots is special if the game ball passes through the specific area 39 during the jackpot game. It becomes the high probability state of the design, the time saving state of the special design, and the high base state (see FIG. 6). This game state is particularly referred to as "high accuracy high base state". The high-probability-high base state ends when the variable display of the special symbols is performed for a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example), or when a big win is achieved and a big win game is executed.

In addition, the game state after the end of the jackpot game when the 15R second and sixth jackpots are won is the normal state of the special symbol because it is extremely difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area 39 during the jackpot game. Then, in addition to this, it becomes a special symbol time saving state and high base state (see FIG. 6). This game state is particularly referred to as "low certainty high base state". In the low-probability-high base state, a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example) of the special symbol variation display is performed, or a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example) of the special symbol variation display is performed before the big hit. is won and a special game (jackpot game) relating to the jackpot is executed. In addition, although the possibility is extremely low, if the game ball passes through the specific area 39 during the big hit game related to the 15R second and sixth big hits, the game state after the big hit game is "high certainty". high base state”. Also, although the possibility is extremely low, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 39 during the 15R 1st and 5th jackpot games, the game state after the jackpot game ends will be " Low definite height base state”.

In addition, the game state after the end of the jackpot game in the case of the 15R third jackpot is a normal state with special symbols because the possibility of the game ball passing through the specific area 39 during the jackpot game is extremely low. In addition to the special symbol non-time saving state and low base state (see FIG. 6). This game state is particularly referred to as "low probability low base state". The low-probability-low base state is a basic game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, that is, an initial game state. In addition, although the possibility is extremely low, if the game ball passes through the specific area 39 during the jackpot game related to the 15R third jackpot, the game state after the jackpot game ends will be the "high certainty" described later. low base state”.

In addition, in the low-probability-low base state, the game state after the end of the jackpot game when the 2R fourth jackpot is won is a high probability of special symbols if the game ball passes through the specific area 39 during the jackpot game. It becomes a non-time saving state and low base state of the state and special pattern (see FIG. 6). This game state is particularly referred to as a "high probability low base state". The high-probability-low base state ends when the variable display of the special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example) or when a big win is achieved and a big win game is executed.

This high-probability-low base state is a state in which the high-probability state is latent, that is, a state in which it is difficult for the player to recognize the high-probability state. That is, the high-probability-low base state is a so-called "latent probability variable state (also referred to as "probability non-announced state")". On the other hand, the above-mentioned high-probability-high base state is a state in which it is clear to the player that it is a high-probability state. In other words, the high probability high base state is the so-called "variable probability gaming state".

In addition, in the high base state, the game state after the end of the jackpot game in the case of the 2R fourth jackpot is "high probability and high base state" if the game ball passes through the specific area 39 during the jackpot game. becomes (see FIG. 6). That is, the time-saving function of the special symbols and the base state are the same as before the execution of the big hit game.

In a high-base state such as a high-probability-high base state or a low-probability-high base state, the game can be advantageously progressed by making the game ball enter the right game area 3R by hitting to the right. That is, the high base state is also a right-handed game state in which the game is played with right-handed. In the high base state, the second starting hole 21 is easier to open than in the low base state, and it is easier to enter the ball into the second starting hole 21 than into the first starting hole 20. because Therefore, in the high base state, while passing the game ball through the gate 28 that triggers the judgment of normal symbol propriety, by hitting right to enter the game ball to the second start port 21, rather than hitting left. Also, you can get a large number of starting balls (opportunities for special symbol suitability determination). In this state, the shooting direction indicator 47 is controlled to light up in a predetermined manner, and informs that the ball should be shot to the right game area. In addition, in the high base state, the variation display of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 (the right or wrong determination of the second special symbol) is mainly performed. However, even in the high base state, when the special figure 2 reserved ball number is "0" and the special figure 1 reserved ball number is "1" or more, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed. In the high base state, right-handed hitting is performed, so the game ball will not enter the first start port 20 and the first special figure reservation will not be newly stored. When the first special figure reservation stored in ) remains, and under that situation, if the number of special figure 2 reservation balls becomes "0", even in a high base state, the first special figure The variable display of the first special symbol is performed by digestion of the hold.

On the other hand, in a low-base state such as a high-probability-low base state or a low-probability-low base state, the game can be advantageously progressed by entering the game ball into the left game area 3L by hitting to the left. That is, the low base state is also a left-handed game state in which the game is played with left-handed. In the low base state, the second start port 21 is more difficult to open than in the high base state, and it is easier to enter the ball into the first start port 20 than into the second start port 21. because Therefore, in the low base state, by hitting left to enter the game ball into the first starting port 20, it is possible to obtain a larger number of starting balls (opportunities for judging whether or not the special symbol is correct) than by hitting right. can be done. In this state, the shooting direction indicator 47 is controlled to light up (display controlled) in a predetermined manner, and informs that the ball should be shot to the left game area. In addition, in the low base state, the variation display of the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 (the right or wrong determination of the first special symbol) is mainly performed. However, even in the low base state, when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "1" or more, the second special figure is displayed with the priority digestion of the second special figure reservation. In the low base state, left-handed hitting is performed, so if it is normal, the game ball will not enter the second start port 21 and the second special figure reservation will not be newly stored, but for example, the game When the state transitions from the high base state (time saving state) to the low base state (normal state), if the second special figure hold stored in the high base state before the transition remains, the low base Even in the state, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed with the preferential digestion of the second special symbol reservation.

The shooting direction indicator 47 is composed of two LEDs of "yz", and indicates the shooting direction by turning on the LEDs according to the game state. For example, in the low base state, it is possible to notify that the ball should be shot to the left game area by displaying both LEDs as "yzz" (for example, □: lights off, ▪: lights on). can. In addition, in the high base state, it is possible to notify that the ball should be shot to the right game area by lighting up both LEDs such as "yz" (for example, □: off, ▪: on). can.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the low probability low base state in which no small winning game or big winning game is performed as a reference, this low probability low base state is the "normal game state" or It can be regarded as a "normal state", and a game in which special symbols are variably displayed in this state can be regarded as a "normal game".

The jackpot game is a game that can be executed by variably displaying the special symbols and stopping and displaying the jackpot symbols. Since it is an advantageous game that can obtain a large amount of prize balls by entering the game ball into the opening 35), the big win game can be regarded as a "special game", and the game state in which the big win game is performed. can be regarded as a "special game state".

In addition, although the small winning game is not as good as the big winning game, it is possible to get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole (first big winning hole 32, second big winning hole 35). can be said to be a game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. Therefore, the small winning game can also be regarded as a "special game", and the game state in which the small winning game is performed can also be regarded as a "special game state". In addition, in order to distinguish between the special game as a big hit game and the special game as a small winning game, the special game as a small winning game can also be regarded as a "small profit special game".

[Main control main processing]
Next, based on FIGS. 10 to 38, the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 (control processing by the main control section) will be described. Incidentally, counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. appearing in the explanation of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 (the game control microcomputer 81). The game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 reads out and executes the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 10 from the ROM of the main control board 80 when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on . As shown in the figure, in the main control main process, initial setting is first performed (S101). Initial settings include, for example, stack settings, constant settings, interrupt time settings, CPU settings of the main control board 80, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) settings, various flags, status and counter resets. etc. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the initial setting (S101) is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

After the initial setting (S101), interrupts are prohibited (S102), and the normal design/special design main random number update process (S103) is executed. In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103), the values of various random number counters shown in FIG. 7 are updated by adding one. When the value of each random number counter reaches the upper limit, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed randomly. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81).

When the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103) ends, the interrupt is permitted (S104). While interrupts are enabled, interrupt processing (S105) can be executed. This interrupt processing (S105) is executed, for example, based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the CPU of the main control board 80 at a 4 ms cycle. Then, after the interrupt process (S105) is completed, the update process of various counter values by the normal design/special design main random number update process (S103) is repeated until the next interrupt process (S105) is started. executed. If an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU while the interrupt is disabled, the interrupt processing (S105) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S104).

[Interrupt processing]
Next, interrupt processing (S105) will be described. As shown in FIG. 11, in the interrupt process (S105), the output process (S201) is first executed. In the output process (S201), the command (control signal) set in the output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81) in each process described below, the sub control board 90 or Output to the payout control board 110 or the like. The commands to be output here include the game state, the results of special symbol win/fail judgment, the symbols as the jackpot types, information on variation patterns, etc., information on the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls (number of prize balls), and the like. be done. A command consists of, for example, 2-byte information. The upper 1 byte is information about the command type, and the lower 1 byte is information about the contents of the command.

In the input process (S202) that follows the output process (S201), various sensors (first starting sensor 20a, second starting sensor 21a, first big winning sensor) mainly attached to the pachinko game machine 1 30a, the second big winning opening sensor 35a, the general winning opening sensor 27a, etc. (see FIG. 5)) is read, and the prize ball payout command is stored in the output buffer of the RAM. Also, when the first starting hole sensor 20a or the second starting hole sensor 21a detects a game ball, a starting ball entry command corresponding to each starting hole is output to the RAM output buffer by the starting ball entering process (S205), which will be described later. memorize to

Here, the prize ball payout command is a payout control board 110 (payout control board 110 (payout control Normally, one prize ball payout command is stored in the output buffer of the RAM for each game ball detected by various sensors such as the starting opening sensor and the big winning opening sensor. The prize ball payout command of this embodiment includes a "prize ball 2 payout command" for instructing the payout of 2 prize balls, a "prize ball 10 payout command" for instructing the payout of 10 prize balls, etc. There are multiple types of commands according to the number of game balls that can be paid out as balls (number of prize balls). 15) commands. For this reason, for example, when the detection signal of the first start sensor 20a is input, "prize ball 4 payout command" is input, and when the detection signal of the second start sensor 21a is input, "prize ball 2 payout command”, when there is an input of the detection signal of the big winning hole sensor 30a, 35a, “15 prize ball payout command”, and when there is an input of the detection signal of the general winning hole sensor 27a, “10 prize ball payout command" is stored in the output buffer respectively. In addition, if there are multiple input detection signals for multiple sensors at the same time, or multiple input detection signals for one sensor at the same time, the total number of prize balls based on those multiple inputs A prize ball payout command corresponding to is stored in the output buffer. Specifically, for example, when the detection signal of the first starting opening sensor 20a (number of prize balls "4") and the detection signal of the general winning opening sensor 27a (number of prize balls "10") are input at the same time is stored in the output buffer, and when the detection signal (the number of prize balls "15") from the first big winning hole sensor 30a is input twice at the same time, two "prize Ball 15 payout command” is stored in the output buffer. However, when a plurality of inputs are made at the same time, individual prize ball payout commands corresponding to the respective inputs may be stored in the output buffer.

The normal design/special design main random number update process (S203) performed next is the same as the normal design/special design main random number update process (S103) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the updating process of various random number counter values (including the normal symbol random number counter value) shown in FIG. period until the next interrupt process (S105) starts).

After the normal design/special design main random number update process (S203), the later-described start opening sensor detection process (S204), start ball time process (S205), normal figure operation process (S206), special figure operation process (S207) , Specific area sensor detection processing (S208), pending ball number processing (S209) and power interruption monitoring processing (S210) are executed. In addition, "other processing" necessary for progressing the game is executed, and the interrupt processing (S105) ends. Then, the processing of S102 to S104 of the main control main processing is repeatedly executed until the next interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80 (see FIG. 10), and when the interrupt pulse is input (after about 4 msec ), and the interrupt process (S105) is executed again. In the output process (S201) of the interrupt process (S105) that is executed again, the commands set in the output buffer of the RAM in the previous interrupt process (S105) are output.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
As shown in FIG. 12, in the starting opening sensor detection process (S204), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 28a (S301). ). If the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (NO at S301), the process proceeds to S305, and if the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES at S301), the number of normal symbol holding balls (normal pattern holding number, specifically, the value of a counter that counts the number of normal pattern reservations provided in the RAM) is less than 4 (S302).

If the number of normal symbol reserved balls is not less than 4 (NO in S302), the process proceeds to S305. On the other hand, if the number of normal design reserved balls is less than 4 (YES in S302), "1" is added to the normal number of reserved design balls (S303), and normal design random number acquisition processing (S304) is performed. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304), the value of the random number counter for normal symbol validity determination (label-TRND-H, FIG. 7(B)) stored in the updated value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is acquired. Then, the acquisition random value (acquisition information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of normal design reservation balls out of the normal design reservation storage section provided in the RAM of the main control board 80.

In S305, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting hole 21, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the second starting hole sensor 21a (S305). When the game ball has not entered the second start port 21 (NO in S305), the process proceeds to S309, and when the game ball has entered the second start port 21 (YES in S305). , The number of special figure 2 pending balls (the number of second special figure reservations, specifically the number of the counter that counts the number of second special figure reservations provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80) is less than 4 (upper limit number) (S306). Then, if the number of special figures 2 reserved balls is not less than 4 (NO in S306), the process proceeds to S309, and if the number of special figures 2 reserved balls is less than 4 (YES in S306), special figures 2 Add 1 to the number of held balls (S307).

Then special figure 2 relation random number acquisition processing (S308) it does. In the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the special symbol propriety determination random number counter (label-TRND-A) stored in the updated value storage area (not shown) of the RAM, the random number for determining the jackpot type Acquire the value of the counter (label-TRND-AS) and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) (that is, acquire the random number value shown in FIG. information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of special-figure 2-holding balls out of the second special-figure holding storage unit 85b.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first start hole 20, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the first start hole sensor 20a (S309). When the game ball has not entered the first start port 20 (NO in S309), the process is finished, and when the game ball enters the first start port 20 (YES in S309), the special figure 1 Whether the number of pending balls (the number of the first special pending, specifically the number of the counter that counts the number of the first special pending, provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80) is less than 4 (upper limit number) (S310). Then, if the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is not less than 4 (NO at S310), the process is finished, and if the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is less than 4 (YES at S310), the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is incremented by "1" (S311).

Then special figure 1 relation random number acquisition processing (S312) it does. In the special figure 1 relation random number acquisition process (S312), like the special figure 2 relation random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the special symbol propriety determination counter stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM (label-TRND-A), the value of the jackpot type determination random number counter (label-TRND-AS) and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) are obtained (that is, the random number shown in FIG. 7 (A) numerical value), and store those obtained random values in the address space corresponding to the current number of special figure 1 reserved balls out of the first special figure reserved storage unit.

[Starting ball entry process]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the start entrance sensor detection process (S204) and then the start ball entry process (S205). As shown in FIG. 13, in the start-up ball processing (S205), first, it is determined whether or not the number of special-figure 2 reserved balls has increased by "1" (S315). Then, when it is determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has increased by "1" (YES in S315), the process proceeds to S316. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the special figure 2 reserved ball number at S307 in the starting opening sensor detection process (S204) based on the game ball entering the second starting opening. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has not increased (NO in S315), the process proceeds to S319.

In S316, the latest acquired random number (acquired information) acquired in the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308) in the immediately preceding start sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit (acquired information) is read ( S316). Next, the acquisition random number value related to the read second special symbol is determined (S317). In S317, among the obtained random numbers read out, the value of the special symbol success/failure determination random number counter (special symbol success/failure determination random number) is determined according to the current game state (low probability state or high probability state). If the result of the determination is a big win, the type of the big win is further determined. The processing of this S317 is equivalent to prior determination (so-called "reservation look-ahead") performed prior to the validity determination (S1303, S1309) in special figure 2 validity determination processing (S1202) described later.

It should be noted that the prior determination of whether or not the jackpot, jackpot determination table (see FIG. 8 (A)), that is, if the high probability state jackpot determination table for high probability state, normal state (low probability state) For example, based on the jackpot determination table for the normal state, it is possible to determine whether or not the value matches the jackpot determination value. In addition, as another prior determination mode, as a variation pattern information determination table that can determine variation pattern information, a variation pattern information determination table for normal state (for low probability state) and for high probability state (for high probability state) and a variation pattern information determination table. Then, in the preliminary determination, predetermined variation pattern information is selected based on the obtained random number value (such as the value of the random number counter for determining whether the special symbol is correct) and the variation pattern information determination table according to the game state. It is possible to Then, from the selected variation pattern information, it is possible to identify whether or not the game is a big win, the type of the big win, and whether or not a game effect with a high degree of reliability of the big win is to be executed.

Next, in S318, the game information (preliminary determination information) related to the result of the preliminary determination by S317, specifically, the information indicating whether the special symbol success/failure determination random number value matches the big hit determination value (hit/failure information) and , Command data including information indicating the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (random number value for determining the jackpot type), information indicating the value of the variation pattern random number counter (variation pattern random number value), etc. and set the command in the output buffer of the RAM (S318). In addition, as a special figure 2 start ball command, part or all of the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number read in S316 may be sent to the sub control board as it is, or the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number is not sent as it is, but the game information (for example, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern information, etc.) obtained based on the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number may be sent.

In addition, by analyzing the special figure 2 start ball command transmitted from the main control unit 80 by the sub-control unit 90, whether it is information related to the big hit, which kind of big hit, and which variation pattern and the like can be identified by the sub-controller 90 . Also, in this embodiment, in addition to this, by analyzing the special figure 2 start ball command, whether the acquired special figure 2 acquisition random number becomes a big hit when determined in a high probability state, and low probability It is possible to specify whether or not a big hit will be achieved when determined by the state. As a result, the sub-control unit 90 stores the received special figure 2 start ball command as a hold (production hold information), pre-determines the production hold information at a specific timing, and determines whether it is correct or not in a low probability state. It is possible to determine whether or not performance suspension information determined to be a big hit is stored in .

In addition, from the viewpoint of fraud prevention, the random number for determining whether the special symbol is right or wrong among the acquired random numbers read in S316 is not sent as it is to the sub-control unit, and the value of the other random number counter for determining the jackpot type (jackpot Random number for type determination) and information indicating the value of the variation pattern random number counter (variation pattern random number), and information indicating the result of prior determination Generate command data as a special figure 2 start ball command, can be set.

Next, in S319, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in special figure 1 has increased by "1" (S319) in the same manner as in the processing relating to special figure 2 described above. Then, when it is determined that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls has increased by "1" (YES in S319), the process proceeds to S320. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the special figure 1 reserved ball number at S311 in the starting hole sensor detection process (S204) based on the game ball entering the first starting hole. On the other hand, in S319, when it is determined that the number of Toku-zu 1 reserved balls has not increased (NO in S319), the process ends as it is.

In S320, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON (S320), and if it is determined that the time saving flag is ON, that is, in the high base state (YES in S320), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving flag is OFF in S320, that is, it is in the low base state (NO in S320), the process proceeds to the process related to the prior determination after S321.

The processing of S321 to S323 is to perform the processing similar to that of S316 to S318 described above for the special figure 1. That is, the latest acquisition random number (acquisition information) acquired in the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312) in the starting entrance sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit (S321), Pre-judgment is performed for the obtained random number value read out (S322). Then, the command data including the game information related to this prior determination is generated as a special figure 1 starting entry command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S323). It should be noted that the prior determination of S322 (reserved prefetch) is performed prior to the validity determination (S1603, S1609) in the special figure 1 validity determination process (S1207) described later.

Here, in the high base state, the opening extension function that increases the frequency of entering the second starting port 21 is operating, and the judgment of special figure 2 (see FIG. 8 (B)) is likely to be performed. It's becoming Also, in this embodiment, as will be described later, digestion of the special figure 2 reservation (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed with priority over digestion of the special figure 1 reservation (variation display of the first special symbol). there is From this, in this embodiment, pre-determination (special figure 1 pre-determination) related to special figure 1 reservation is performed in a low base state where the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is mainly performed, special figure 2 reservation Regarding the prior determination (special figure 2 prior determination), it is supposed to be performed regardless of whether it is a low base state or a high base state. In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, as will be described later, it is controlled to a low probability low base state during the jackpot game, but the game ball enters the first start port 20 during the jackpot game Even if the number of FIG. 1 pending balls increases by "1", the processing of S321 to S323 (special figure 1 pre-determination processing) is not performed.

[Normal figure action processing]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs the normal pattern operation process (S207) shown in FIG. 14 following the starting ball entry game process (S206). In the general pattern operation process (S207), the processing related to the normal symbol display 42 and the variable winning device 22 is divided into four stages, and "normal pattern operation status 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each of these stages. . Then, when the "normal pattern operation status" is "1" (YES in S401), the normal symbol standby process (S402) is performed, and when the "normal pattern operation status" is "2" (S401 NO in S403, YES in S403), perform normal design fluctuation process (S404), and when "normal pattern operation status" is "3" (NO in S401, S403, YES in S405), normal design confirmation Processing (S406) is performed, and when the "normal figure operation status" is "4" (NO in all of S401, S403, and S405), normal electric accessory processing (S407) is performed. In addition, the general figure operation status is "1" in the initial setting.

[Normal symbol standby process]
As shown in FIG. 15, in the normal design standby process (S402), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the normal design is "0" (S501), and if "0" (YES in S501 ), ending this process. On the other hand, if it is not "0" (NO in S501), the normal symbol suitability determination process, which will be described later, is performed (S502), and then the normal symbol variation pattern selection process is performed (S503). In the normal symbol variation pattern selection process, the normal symbol variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 8(D) is referred to, and if the game state is a time saving state, a normal symbol variation pattern with a normal symbol variation time of 1 second is selected. do. On the other hand, if the game state is a non-time-saving state, a normal design variation pattern in which the normal design variation time is 30 seconds is selected. After finishing the normal design variation pattern selection process (S503), the normal design random number shift process (S504) described later is performed, then the normal design variation start process (S505) is performed, and the process is completed. In the normal design variation start process, the normal design variation display is started based on the normal design variation pattern selected in S503, and the normal operation status is set to "2". Also, in the normal symbol variation start process, a normal symbol variation start command is set in order to inform the sub-control board 90 of the start of normal symbol variation.

[Normal symbol suitability determination process]
As shown in FIG. 16, in the normal symbol validity determination process (S502), first, the value of the normal symbol validity determination random number counter (label-TRND-H) stored in the normal symbol retention storage unit is read out (S601). . Next, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON (that is, whether or not the game state is the time saving state) (S602). In S602, if it is determined that the time saving flag is ON, that is, the time saving state (YES in S602), the table for the time saving state out of the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 8 (C) (hit determination value is " 0” to “239”), it is determined whether or not it is a hit (S604), and the process proceeds to S605. That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the read random number counter for judging normal symbol validity (label -TRND-H) matches any of the hit judgment values. On the other hand, in S602, the time saving flag is not ON, that is, if it is determined that it is in the non-time saving state (NO in S602), the table for the non-time saving state out of the normal symbol per determination table shown in FIG. 8 (C) (hit Based on the judgment value "0", "1"), it is judged whether or not it is a hit (S603), and the process proceeds to S605. Then, in S605, the result of the general figure right or wrong determination (S603, S604) is to determine whether it is a hit (per normal figure) (S605), and if it is determined to be off (NO in S605), the stop display is off A normal pattern (normal pattern off pattern) is determined (S606), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined to be a hit (per normal pattern) in S605 (YES in S605), the normal pattern (per pattern per normal pattern) to be stopped and displayed is determined (S607), and the flag per normal pattern is turned ON (S608 ) to end the process.

[Normal symbol random number shift process]
As shown in FIG. 17, in the normal symbol random number shift process (S504), first, the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S701). Next, the storage location of each general map reservation in the general map reservation storage unit is shifted by one from the current position to the read side (S702). Then, the address space, which is the storage location of the highest reserved memory in the normal pattern reservation storage unit, is emptied ("0"), that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth normal pattern reservation is cleared to 0 (S703 ) to end the process. In this way, the reserves are digested in the order of reserves.

[Processing during normal symbol fluctuation]
As shown in FIG. 18, in the normal design fluctuation process (S404), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal design has passed (S801), and if it has not passed (NO in S801), the process is finished. . On the other hand, if it has passed (YES in S801), the normal symbol fluctuation stop command is set (S802), and the general pattern operation status is set to "3" (S803). Then, other processing such as stopping the variable display of normal symbols with the display result (hitting normal symbols or losing normal symbols) according to the determination result of the random number for determining whether the normal symbols are correct is performed (S804), and this processing is performed. Finish.

[Normal design confirmation process]
As shown in FIG. 19, in the normal pattern determination process (S406), first, it is determined whether or not the normal pattern hit flag is ON (S901). If the normal pattern hit flag is not ON (NO in S901), the normal pattern operation status is set to "1" (S905), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the normal figure hit flag is ON (YES in S901), then it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON, that is, whether it is in the time saving state (S902). Then, if it is in the time saving state (YES in S902), the opening pattern in the time saving state is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second start port 21) (S903). The opening pattern in the time saving state is, as described above, an opening pattern in which opening for 2.0 seconds is repeated three times. Therefore, "3" is set to the second starting port open counter that counts the number of times the second starting port 21 is opened.

On the other hand, if it is in the non-time-saving state (NO in S902), the open pattern during the non-time-saving state is set as the open pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second start port 21) (S906). The open pattern in the non-time saving state is, as described above, an open pattern that opens once for 0.2 seconds. Therefore, "1" is set to the second starting port open counter. Then, following the setting of the open pattern (S903, S906), the general pattern operation status is set to "4" (S904), and this process ends.

[Normal electric accessory processing]
As shown in FIG. 20, in the normal electric accessary product process (S407), first, it is determined whether or not the end flag per normal pattern is ON (S1001). Ordinary figure per end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second start port 21 has ended in the auxiliary game executed as a hit.

If the normal pattern per end flag is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether or not the second starting port 21 is open (S1002). If it is not open (NO in S1002), it is determined whether or not the time (timing) for opening the second starting port 21 has arrived (S1003). If so (YES in S1003), the second starting port 21 is opened (S1004), and the process ends. On the other hand, if the second starting port 21 is being opened (YES in S1002), whether or not the time (timing) for closing the second starting port 21 has come (S1005), if it has not reached (NO at S1005), the process is finished, and if it has reached (YES at S1005), the second start port 21 is closed (closed ) (S1006).

Then, following the closing process of the second starting port 21 (S1006), the value of the second starting port open counter is decremented by 1 (S1007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the second starting port open counter is "0". (S1008). If it is not "0" (NO in S1008), the process ends as it is to open the second starting port 21 again. On the other hand, if it is "0" (YES at S1008), end processing for ending the auxiliary game is performed (S1009), and an end flag for normal pattern is set (S1010) to end the process. In addition, the second starting port open counter becomes "0" when the opening of the second starting port 21 (opening operation of the movable member 23) is performed three times during the time saving state, and if it is during the non-time saving state When the second starting port 21 is opened once, it becomes "0".

On the other hand, if the end flag per normal pattern is ON in S1001 (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second starting port 21 of the number of times set in S903 or S906 has ended, so The hit end flag is turned OFF (S1011), the normal pattern hit flag is turned OFF (S1012), the normal pattern operation status is set to "1" (S1013), and the process ends. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the normal symbol standby process (S402) is executed again as the normal symbol operation process (FIG. 13).

[Normal electric accessory processing]
As shown in FIG. 20, in the normal electric accessary product process (S407), first, it is determined whether or not the end flag per normal pattern is ON (S1001). Ordinary figure per end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second start port 21 has ended in the auxiliary game executed as a hit. If the normal pattern per end flag is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether or not the second starting port 21 is open (S1002). If it is not open (NO in S1002), it is determined whether or not the time (timing) for opening the second start port 21 has arrived (S1003). If so, the second starting port 21 is opened (S1004), and the process ends. On the other hand, if the second starting port 21 is being opened (YES in S1002), whether or not the time (timing) for closing the second starting port 21 has come (S1005), if it has not reached (NO in S1005), the process is finished, and if it has reached (YES in S1005), the second starting port 21 is closed (closed). (S1006).

Then, following the closing process of the second starting port 21 (S1006), the value of the second starting port open counter is decremented by 1 (S1007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the second starting port open counter is "0". (S1008). If it is not "0" (NO in S1008), the process ends as it is to open the second starting port 21 again. On the other hand, if it is "0" (YES in S1008), the normal pattern per end process to end the auxiliary game is performed (S1009), and the normal pattern per end flag is set (S1010) to end the process. In addition, the second starting port open counter becomes "0" when the opening of the second starting port 21 (opening operation of the movable member 23) is performed three times during the time saving state, and if it is during the non-time saving state When the second starting port 21 is opened once, it becomes "0".

On the other hand, if the normal pattern per end flag is ON in S1001 (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second start port 21 of the number of times set in S903 or S906 has ended, so per normal pattern The end flag is turned OFF (S1011), the normal pattern per flag is turned OFF (S1012), the normal pattern operation status is set to "1" (S1013), and the process ends. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the normal symbol standby process (S402) is executed again as the normal symbol operation process (FIG. 13).

[Special figure action processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special figure operation process (S207) following the normal figure operation process (S206). As shown in FIG. 21, in the special figure operation process (S207), the processing relating to the special symbol display 41 and the big winning device (first big winning device 31 and second big winning device 36) is divided into five stages. "Special figure operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each stage. And, if the special figure operation status is "1" (YES in S1101) special symbol standby process (S1102), if the special figure operation status is "2" (NO in S1101, YES in S1103) Special symbol fluctuation processing (S1104), if the special symbol operation status is "3" (NO in both S1101 and S1103, YES in S1105) special symbol determination process (S1106), special symbol operation status is "4" If (S1101, S1103, S1105 both NO, S1107 YES) special electric auditors processing 1 as a jackpot game (S1108), if the special figure operation status is "5" (S1101, S1103, S1105 , All of S1107 are NO), special electric accessary product processing 2 (S1109) as a small hit game is performed respectively. It should be noted that the special figure operation status is "1" in the initial setting.

[Special symbol standby process]
As shown in FIG. 22, in the special symbol standby process (S1102), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the second starting port 21 (that is, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls) is "0" (S1201 ). If the number of special figures 2 reserved balls is "0" (YES in S1201), that is, if there is no storage of the random number counter value acquired based on the entry to the second start port 21, the first start It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of mouth 20 (that is, the number of reserved balls of special figure 1) is "0" (S1206). Then, if the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls is also "0" (YES in S1206), that is, if there is no memory of the random number counter value acquired based on the entry to the first start port 20, the image It is determined whether or not the process of setting the display screen of the display device to the standby screen (executing a demo screen for customer waiting) is in progress (S1211). If processing is not being performed (NO in S1211), standby screen setting processing is executed to display the standby screen (S1212).

In S1201, if the special figure 2 reserved ball number is not "0" (NO in S1201), that is, if there is one or more stored random number counter values acquired based on the ball entering the second start port 21 , Toku-zu 2 propriety determination processing (S1202), Toku-zu 2 variation pattern selection processing (S1203), Toku-zu 2 random number shift processing (S1204), Toku-zu 2 variation start processing (S1205) are performed in this order. Also, if the number of special 2 reserved balls is "0" but the number of special 1 reserved balls is not "0" (YES in S1201, NO in S1206), that is, the random number counter value related to the second start port 21 Although there is no memory, if there is one or more memory of the random number counter value acquired based on the entry to the first starting port 20, special figure 1 validity determination processing (S1207) described later, special figure 1 fluctuation Pattern selection process (S1208), special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1210) are performed in this order. Thus, in this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol based on the first special figure reservation is performed only when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (YES in S1201). That is, digestion of the second special symbol reservation (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed with priority over digestion of the first special symbol reservation (variation display of the first special symbol). In this embodiment, the win/loss determination based on the second special figure reservation is more likely to result in a big hit with a large profit for the player than the win/loss determination based on the first special figure reservation (Fig. 8 (B )).

[Special figure 2 suitability determination process]
As shown in FIG. 23, in the special figure 2 propriety determination process (S1202), first, as a determination value, the lowest area of the special figure reservation storage unit of the RAM (that is, the second special figure reservation corresponding to the first (S1301). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is ON, that is, whether or not the state is a high probability state (S1302). Then, if it is not a high probability state (NO in S1302), that is, if it is a normal state, the normal state hit determination table (see FIG. 8A) , "397"), a decision is made (S1303). On the other hand, if it is in a high probability state (YES in S1302), the winning judgment is performed based on the big hit judgment table for the high probability state among the hit judgment tables (see FIG. 8A) (S1309). In the high-probability state jackpot determination table, the jackpot determination values are "3", "53", "113", "173", "227", "281", "337", "397", "449", It is called "503".

If it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination (S1303, S1309) is a "jackpot" (YES in S1304), the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (label-TRND-AS) is read and shown in FIG. The jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type determination table shown (S1310), the jackpot pattern is determined based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (S1311), the jackpot flag is turned ON (S1312), and the process is finished. . In addition, in the case of the success/failure determination related to the first special symbol, the big hit type is determined using the first special symbol jackpot type determination table, and in the case of the success/failure determination related to the second special symbol, the second special symbol The jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table. Then, when it is determined to be a big hit in the winning/failure determination of the first special symbol (special figure 1), it is one of the 15R first big hit, the 15R second big hit, the 15R third big hit and the 2R fourth big hit, and the second big hit. If it is determined that the special symbol (special figure 2) is a big hit, it is a 15R 5th big hit or a 15R 6th big hit (see FIG. 8(B)).

Corresponding to this, in this embodiment, the jackpot flag is turned ON when the jackpot type is the 15R first jackpot, the 15R second jackpot, the 15R third jackpot, the 15R fifth jackpot or the 15R sixth jackpot. A long hit flag to be turned on and a short hit flag to be turned on when the 2R fourth big hit is provided. Then, when the 2R fourth big win is achieved and the short win flag is turned ON, the 2R lamp (see FIG. 4) of the round indicator 45 lights up at the timing when the 2R fourth big win symbol is displayed. be done. Specifically, the display mode is such as "2R▴15RΔ" (for example, ▲: lights on, Δ: lights off). In addition, when the long hit flag is turned on as one of the 15R first to third big hits, the 15R fifth big hit and the 15R sixth big hit, the 15R lamp (Fig. 4) is lit up. Specifically, it becomes a display mode like "2RΔ15R▴".

Here, the big hit judgment (special symbol success or failure judgment) and the big hit type determination judgment may be called "judgment" respectively, and even if it is called "judgment" including which big hit pattern is determined by judging the big hit good. These results may also be called "determination results".

On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination (S1303, S1309) is not a "big hit" (NO in S1304), it is determined whether or not it is a small hit (S1305). That is, it is determined whether or not the value (label-TRND-A) of the random number counter for determining whether or not the special symbol is right or wrong matches any of the small hit determination values "101" to "105" (FIG. 8 (A) ). Then, when it is determined that it is not a "small hit" (NO in S1305), the winning pattern is determined (S1308), and the process ends. In other words, if the result of the success/failure determination (S1303, S1309) is neither a "big hit" nor a "minor hit", the result is "loss". On the other hand, if it is determined that the result of the small hit determination (S1305) is "small hit" (YES in S1305), the small hit pattern is determined (S1306), the small hit flag is turned ON (S1307), and the process is performed. Finish. In addition, a random number for determining whether or not the game is a small hit may be provided separately from the random number for judging whether or not the special symbol is appropriate.

[Tokuzu 2 variation pattern selection process]
In the special symbol standby process (see FIG. 22), the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process is performed (S1203) following the special figure 2 propriety determination process (S1202). As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1203), first, it is determined whether the gaming state is a time saving state (whether the time saving flag is ON) (S1401 ). Then, if it is not a time saving state (NO in S1401), that is, if it is a non time saving state, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (S1402), and if it is ON (YES in S1402), a non time saving state Refer to the middle jackpot table (part corresponding to the non-time saving state and jackpot of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9) to select the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) ( S1403). It should be noted that if the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. In addition, in this embodiment, the non-time-saving state medium jackpot table is also divided according to whether the jackpot is a long hit (15R jackpot) or a short hit (2R jackpot) (see FIG. 9). However, this process is a variation pattern selection process for the special figure 2, and there is only the 15R fifth big hit (long hit) in the big hit won in the lottery of the special figure 2 (see FIG. 6). Therefore, the part referred to in this process is always the long hit part, and the variation pattern P1 or P2 is selected. In addition, the table for big hits in non-time-saving state does not need to be divided into the object for long hits, and the object for short hits. This is the same for the table for big hits in the time saving state, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not ON (NO in S1402), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON (S1405). Then, if the small hit flag is ON (YES in S1405), refer to the non-time saving state medium and small hit table (the part corresponding to the non-time saving state and small hit of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9), and change A variation pattern is selected based on the pattern random number counter value (S1409). Specifically, the variation pattern P4 is always selected in this embodiment.

Also, if the small hit flag is not ON (NO in S1405), it means that it is neither a big hit nor a small hit, and in this case, whether the number of reserved second special symbols is "1" or "2". It is determined whether or not (S1406). The number of reservations here is the number of memories including the information that determines the variation pattern by this process, so the number of reservations is any value from "1" to "4". Then, in S1406, if it is determined that the number of reservations is "1" or "2" (YES in S1406), the table for the first reservation number in the non-time saving state (non-time saving out of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 state and off and the part corresponding to the number of held balls "1, 2") to select a variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1407). In this embodiment, one of the variation patterns P5-P8 is selected.

On the other hand, in S1406, if it is determined that the number of holds is not "1" or "2", that is, "3" or "4" (NO in S1406), the table for the second hold number out of non-time saving state (Fig. 9 of the variation pattern table shown in Figure 9, the part corresponding to the non-time saving state and off and the number of retained balls "3, 4"), and the variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label -TRND-T1) Select (S1408). In this embodiment, one of the variation patterns P9-P12 is selected. Here, the first pending number deviation table in the non-time saving state is set to have a higher possibility of selecting a variation pattern of a relatively long time variation time than the second pending number deviation table. Also, the shortest selectable fluctuation time (12000 ms) is set to be longer than that of the table for second reserved number deviation (4000 ms). In other words, when it comes off, the function of shortening variation according to the number of reserved balls works, and when the number of reserved balls of special symbols is "3" or "4", the number of reserved balls of special symbols A variation pattern with a shorter variation time than when the value is 1 or 2 is selected.

Also, in the above-mentioned S1401, when it is determined that the gaming state is the time saving state (YES in S1401), it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is ON (S1410 in FIG. 25). Then, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S1410), the table for the jackpot in the time saving state (the part corresponding to the time saving state and the jackpot in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9) is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern A variation pattern is selected based on the random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1411). As described above, this process is a variation pattern selection process for special figure 2, and since there is only a 15R fifth big hit (long hit) in the jackpot that is won in the special figure 2 lottery (see FIG. 6 See), in S1411, the variation pattern P13 or P14 corresponding to the long hit is selected.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit flag is not ON at S1410 (NO at S1410), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON (S1412). Then, if the small hit flag is ON (YES in S1412), referring to the time saving state medium and small hitting table (the part corresponding to the time saving state and small hit of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9), the variation pattern random number A variation pattern is selected based on the counter value (S1416). Specifically, the variation pattern P16 is always selected in this embodiment.

Also, if it is determined that the small hit flag is not ON in S1412 (NO in S1412), that is, if it is out, it is determined whether or not the number of pending second special symbols is "1" (S1413). The number of reservations referred to here is also the same as described above, and the number of reservations is any value from "1" to "4". Then, when it is determined that the number of reservations is "1" (YES in S1413), the table for the third reservation number out of the time saving state (non-time saving state and out of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 and the number of reserved balls " 1”) to select a variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1414). In this embodiment, one of the variation patterns P17-P20 is selected. On the other hand, in S1413, if the number of holds is not "1", that is, if it is determined that the number of holds is any of "2" to "4" (NO in S1413), the table for the fourth hold number out of time saving state (The part corresponding to the time saving state and off and the number of held balls "2 to 4" in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9), the variation pattern based on the random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) is selected (S1415). In this embodiment, one of the variation patterns P21-P24 is selected.

In this way, in the variation pattern table during the time saving state (the part corresponding to the time saving state of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9), the function of shortening variation according to the number of held balls when out is the number of held balls "2 ” to “4”. In addition, when a long hit is won among jackpots, a variation pattern with a shorter variation time is more likely to be selected than during the non-time-saving state. That is, the variation pattern table during the time saving state is a table such that the average value of the variation time of the special symbol is shorter than the variation pattern table during the non-time saving state. As a result, in the time saving state, compared to the non-time saving state (normal state), the digestion speed of the special figure reservation is hastened (the game during the time saving progresses quickly).

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, other processing (S1404) shown in FIG. 24 is performed, and this processing ends. It should be noted that, in other processing (S1404), the variation pattern specification command corresponding to the selected variation pattern (variation pattern specification command corresponding to special figure 2) is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set variation pattern designation command is included in a variation start command, which will be described later, and sent to the sub-control board 90 by output processing (S201).

[Special figure 2 random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 26, in the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1204), first, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S1501). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the second special figure reservation storage unit is one lower side (for example, if the second special figure reservation storage unit consists of an address space corresponding to the address "0000" to "0003", the address "0000" side) (S1502). Then, set "0" to the highest address space of the second special figure reservation storage unit, that is, (if stored up to the upper limit number) RAM area corresponding to the fourth of the second special figure reservation is cleared to 0 (S1503), and this processing ends.

After executing the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1204), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1205) in the special symbol standby process (S1102) shown in FIG. 22 is performed. In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1205), the special figure operation status is set to "2", the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started.

Also, in the special symbol standby process (S1102) in FIG. 22, when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" and the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is not "0" (YES in S1201, NO in S1206) To, special figure 1 propriety determination processing (S1207), special figure 1 variation pattern selection processing (S1208), special figure 1 random number shift processing (S1209), special figure 1 variation start processing (S1210) are performed in this order.

[Special figure 1 suitability determination process]
As shown in FIG. 27, in the special figure 1 validity determination process (S1207), the process (S1601 to S1612) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 2 validity determination process (S1202) shown in FIG. Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted.

However, since this process is a process related to the special figure 1, in S1601, it is stored in the lowest area of the first special figure reservation storage unit in the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation) Read out the random number counter value (label-TRND-A) for special symbol suitability determination. Also, in the determination of the type of jackpot in S1610, there is a possibility that it will be determined as any of the 15R first jackpot, the 15R second jackpot, the 15R third jackpot, and the 2R fourth jackpot (FIG. 8(B)). As shown in the column of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in FIG. 8(B), the allocation rate of each jackpot is 40% for the 15R first jackpot, 20% for the 15R second jackpot, and 15R third jackpot. is 30%, and the 2R fourth jackpot is 10%. When it is determined that the big hit is any of the 15R first big hit, the 15R second big hit and the 15R third big hit, the long hit flag is turned ON as the big hit flag in S1612. On the other hand, when it is determined to be the 2R fourth big hit, the short hit flag is turned ON as the big hit flag in S1612.

[Special figure 1 variation pattern selection process]
As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, in the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1208), the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1203) shown in FIGS. )I do. Therefore, detailed description of this processing is omitted.

However, since this process is a process related to special figure 1, if YES in S1702 (Fig. 28) (that is, if the jackpot flag is ON), the type of jackpot is a 15R jackpot (15R first jackpot, 15R jackpot). 2 jackpot or 15R third jackpot) is determined (S1703). Then, if it is a 15R jackpot (long hit) (YES in S1703), refer to the 15R jackpot table during the non-time saving state (the part corresponding to the non-time saving state and long hit of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9) Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1704). Specifically, the variation pattern P1 or P2 is selected.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a 15R jackpot in S1703 (NO in S1703), that is, if it is a 2R fourth jackpot (short hit), the table for the 2R jackpot during the non-time saving state (out of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 The part corresponding to the non-time saving state and short hit) is referred to, and the variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (S1706). Specifically, the variation pattern P3 is selected.

In addition, in this special figure 1 variation pattern selection process, when YES in S1712 (Fig. 29) (that is, when the jackpot flag is ON), the type of jackpot is 15R jackpot (15R first jackpot, 15R second jackpot) , 15R third jackpot) is determined (S1713). And if it is a 15R jackpot (long hit) (YES in S1713), refer to the 15R jackpot table during the time saving state (the part corresponding to the time saving state and long hit of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9), A variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (S1714). Specifically, the variation pattern P13 or P14 is selected.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a 15R big hit in S1713 (NO in S1713), that is, if it is a 2R fourth big hit (short hit), the table for the 2R big hit in the time saving state (time saving of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9) The part corresponding to the state and short hit) is referred to, and the variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (S1715). Specifically, the variation pattern P15 is selected.

In this special figure 1 variation pattern selection process, after selecting the variation pattern, other processing (S1705, FIG. 28) is performed to finish this process. In other processing (S1705), the variation pattern specification command corresponding to the selected variation pattern (variation pattern specification command corresponding to special figure 1) is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set variation pattern designation command is included in a variation start command, which will be described later, and sent to the sub-control board 90 by output processing (S201).

[Special figure 1 random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 30, in the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), first, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S1801). Then, the storage location of various counter values in the first special figure reservation storage unit is shifted to the lower side by one (S1802). Then, set "0" to the highest address space of the first special figure reservation storage unit, that is, (when stored up to the upper limit number) RAM area corresponding to the fourth of the first special figure reservation is cleared to 0 (S1803), and this processing ends.

After executing the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1210) of FIG. 22 is performed. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1210), the special figure operation status is set to "2", the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started.

[Processing during special symbol fluctuation]
As shown in FIG. 31, in the special symbol variation process (S1104), first, the variation time of the special symbol (variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in S1203 or S1208 of FIG. 22, see FIG. 9) It is determined whether or not it has passed (S1901). If it is determined that the fluctuation time has not passed (NO in S1901), the process ends. As a result, the variable display of the special symbols is continued.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in S1901), a fluctuation stop command is set (S1902). Then, it is determined whether the probability variable flag is ON (S1903), and if it is ON (YES in S1903), the probability variable counter is subtracted by 1 (S1904), and whether the value of the probability variable counter is "0" (S1905). If it is determined in S1905 that the variable probability counter is "0", the variable probability flag is turned OFF (S1906), and the process proceeds to S1907. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variable probability flag is not ON (NO at S1903), or if it is determined that the variable probability counter is not "0" (NO at S1905), the process proceeds to S1907.

And in S1907, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON (S1907), and when it is determined that the time saving flag is ON (YES in S1907), the number of fluctuation display times of the special symbol executed during the time saving state is counted. Subtract 1 from the value of the time-saving counter (S1908), determine whether the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (S1909), and if it is "0" (YES in S1909), turn off the time-saving flag (S1910), proceed to the processing of S1911. Also, if it is determined that the time saving flag is not ON (NO in S1907) or if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter is not "0" (NO in S1909), the process proceeds to S1911. In S1911, the special figure operation status is set to "3" (S1911). Then, other processing such as stopping the variable display of the special symbols according to the determination results of the special symbol propriety determination random number and the jackpot type determination random number is performed (S1912), and this processing is finished.

Here, when the probability variation flag is turned OFF at S1906 or when the time saving flag is turned OFF at S1910, the game state shifts to a low probability state or a non-time saving state (low base state). In this way, when the game state changes with the end of the variable display of the special symbol (variation stop), in S1912, as other processing, a game state designation command indicating the game state after the change is set in the output buffer of the RAM. process. By sending the game state designation command to the sub-control board 90 by the output process (S201), it is possible to grasp the game state on the sub-control side and execute various effects suitable for the game state. In this embodiment, commands corresponding to game states that can be controlled in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are provided in advance as game state designation commands. Specifically, a "normal designation command" that specifies a low probability low base state, a "short time designation command" that designates a low probability high base state, and a "latent designation command" that designates a high probability low base state, It is provided with a "probability variable designation command" that designates a high probability high base state.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
As shown in FIG. 32, in the special symbol determination process (S1106), first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is ON (S2001). If the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S2001), then whether the type of jackpot is 15R jackpot (one of 15R first jackpot, 15R second jackpot, 15R third jackpot, and 15R fifth jackpot). is determined (S2002). Then, if the 15R big hit (that is, if the long-hit flag is ON), the round to be executed during the big hit game (in the mode of opening once per round, one round is from opening to closing of the big winning opening) The value of the round counter that counts the number of times is set to "15", and as the opening pattern of the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30 or second big winning hole 35) (see FIG. 6), 15R first 15R 1st jackpot opening pattern for 15R 2nd jackpot, 15R 2nd jackpot opening pattern for 15R 2nd jackpot, 15R 3rd jackpot opening pattern for 15R 3rd jackpot, 15R 5th jackpot opening pattern If there is, the opening pattern for the 15R fifth big hit is set, and if it is the 15R sixth big hit, the opening pattern for the 15R sixth big hit is set (S2003).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2002 that it is not the 15R jackpot (that is, if the short hit flag is ON), the jackpot type is the 2R fourth jackpot. The opening pattern for the 2R fourth big win (see FIG. 6) is set as the opening pattern of the winning opening (first big winning opening 30 or second big winning opening 35) (S2004).

After completing the processing of S2003 or S2004, in order to start the jackpot game, set the jackpot opening command (S2005), start the jackpot game opening effect (S2006), and set the special figure operation status to "4". (S2007).

Also, when it is determined that the big hit flag is not ON in S2001 (NO in S2001), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON (S2008). As a result, if the small-hit flag is ON (YES in S2008), the value of the small-hit open counter for counting the number of openings of the big-hit opening (second big-hit opening 35) during the small-hit game is set to "2". , and an opening pattern for a small win (see FIG. 6) is set as the opening pattern of the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) (S2009). Then, in order to start the small winning game, set the opening command of the small winning game (S2010), start the opening effect of the small winning game (S2011), and set the special figure operation status to "5" (S2012). . In addition, if the small hit flag is not ON in S2008 (NO in S2008), neither the big hit game nor the small hit game is started, so the special figure operation status is set to "1" and the process ends.

[Special electric accessory processing 1 (jackpot game)]
As shown in FIG. 33, in the special electric auditors processing 1 (S1108), first, it is determined whether the probability variation flag is ON (S2101), and if it is determined to be ON (YES in S2101), the probability variation flag is turned OFF ( S2102). Also, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON (S2103), and if it is determined to be ON (YES in S2103), the time saving flag is turned OFF (S2104). In other words, during execution of the jackpot game, it is controlled to a low probability state and a non-time saving state. In this embodiment, since it is always in the low base state during the non-time saving state, it is also controlled to the low probability and low base state during execution of the big hit game.

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (S2105). The jackpot end flag is a flag indicating that all the jackpots (the first jackpot 30 and the second jackpot 35) have been opened (the jackpot game has ended) in the jackpot game. If the jackpot end flag is not ON (NO in S2105), it is determined whether or not the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30 or second big winning hole 35) is open (S2106). If it is not open (NO in S2106), whether or not the time (timing) for opening the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30 or second big winning hole 35) has come, that is, the opening time of the big win has passed. It is determined whether or not it is time to start the first round, or whether it is time to start the next round (next opening) after the time interval between rounds has elapsed (S2107). This is determined based on the big winning opening opening pattern set for each big winning type described above. For example, if it is before the start of the first round, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the first opening process of the first round after the opening period has ended. Further, if the first round has already started, it is determined whether or not the previous round has ended and the predetermined interval period has ended. Incidentally, the round may be simply referred to as "R" and may also be referred to as "round game". In addition, the opening period is a period set before the start of the first opening operation of the big winning opening in the jackpot game and after the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol) is disabled. ” is also called. In this embodiment, the jackpot opening period (opening time) is set to 8000 ms (8 seconds).

If the judgment result of S2107 is NO, the process is finished as it is. On the other hand, if the determination result in S2107 is YES, it is determined whether or not the round to be executed corresponds to either the first round or the second round, that is, whether or not it is the V round (S2108). ). This may be determined by using the value of a round counter for each jackpot type, or may be determined by providing a round counter for counting the number of rounds to be executed separately. If the round to be executed is not the V round (NO in S2108), that is, if it is any of the 3rd to 15th rounds, the process proceeds to S2110 and the first big win according to the opening pattern (see FIG. 6) corresponding to the type of jackpot. In order to open the winning opening 30, the first big winning device 31 is operated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round to be executed is the V round (1st round or 2nd round) (YES in S2108), the V effective period setting process (S2109) is performed, and then the process proceeds to S2110 to determine the type of jackpot. The second big winning device 36 is operated to open the second big winning port 35 in accordance with the opening pattern (see FIG. 6) corresponding to . Also, when opening the big winning opening (the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35), that is, when starting a round, a round start command for the corresponding round is set. For example, a round start command that can specify the round to be started is set, such as "1R start command" for the start of the first round and "2R start command" for the start of the second round. The set round start command is transmitted to the sub-controller 90 by the output process of S201.

In the V valid period setting process (S2109), a specific area is set for several seconds during the opening of the second large winning opening 35 and after the closing of the second large winning opening 35 in the V round (1st round or 2nd round in this embodiment). A period (corresponding to the first period) during which detection of the game ball by the sensor 39a is determined to be effective is set. In addition, in the present embodiment, the period other than this (including the time during the small hit or when the special game is not executed) is the period (corresponding to the second period) in which the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is determined to be invalid. is set to Here, determining that the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is valid means that the V flag is turned ON based on the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a (S2401 to S2403 of the specific area sensor detection process described later). ), and determining that the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is invalid means that the V flag is not turned ON even if the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a.

Here, at the timing when the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a and the V flag is turned ON, the game state indicator 46 is set to a predetermined display mode, and the game state after the jackpot game ends becomes a high probability state. to be notified. Specifically, the gaming state display 46 is composed of three LEDs "a1a2a3". In this embodiment, in the normal state (low-probability state), the display mode is "a1□a2□a3□" (eg, □: off, ▪: on). Further, when the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a during the jackpot game and the V flag is turned ON, the display mode of "a1, a2, a3," is set. Then, when the jackpot game ends and the game state is set to the high probability state, the display mode is set to "a1□a2□a3□". In addition, the lighting control timing of the game status indicator 46 is not limited to such timing, and during the jackpot game, even if the game ball passes through the specific area, the display mode remains "a1□a2□a3□". , the display mode may be "a1, a2, a3," at the timing of shifting to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game, and "a1, a2, a3," at the timing of shifting from the high probability state to the low probability state. .

That is, in the specific area sensor detection process (S208) described later, the V flag is turned ON only when the V passage (passage of the game ball to the specific area 39) during the V valid period is detected, and the V flag is turned ON outside the V valid period (V invalid period) The V flag is not turned ON when the V passage is detected in the middle). In addition, when the V flag is ON, the variable probability flag is turned ON, that is, the game state after the big hit game is set to a high probability state (see the game state setting process described later). By doing so, the V flag is prevented from being turned ON based on V passing by fraudulent act, that is, it is prevented from being illegally set to a high probability state.

In addition, if there is a V pass in the V round (1st or 2nd round) of the big win game, the game state after the end of the big win game is set to a high probability state, and even if there is a V pass during the small win game, If the game state before the small winning game is a normal state, the game state after the small winning game is also normal state, and if the game state before the small winning game is a high probability state, after the small winning game is ended. The game state is also set to a high probability state. In other words, before and after the small winning game, the success/failure determination probability is not changed.

In this embodiment, in the V effective period setting process (S2109), even if the 15R second and third big hits, during the period (first period) in which the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is determined to be effective However, as another aspect, in the case of the 15R second and third jackpots, the first period may not be set in the V round. That is, in the case of the 15R second and third jackpots, the V round may be set to the second period. 15R In the jackpot game related to the second and third jackpots, the opening time of the second jackpot 35 is set to a very short time of 0.1 second, so the game ball enters the second jackpot 35. Although the possibility is extremely low, if the second period is set, the V flag will not be turned ON even if the ball hits the ball. As a result, it is possible to prevent the V flag from being turned on illegally or by a rare ball entry. In this embodiment, the 1st round and the 2nd round are V rounds, and the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is effective in the V rounds, but the location of the V rounds is not limited to this.

In S2106, if the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30 or second big winning hole 35) is open (YES in S2106), the number of balls entering the big winning hole in that round is the specified maximum number of balls. It is determined whether or not the number has reached (10 per round in this embodiment) (S2111). If the specified number of balls has not been entered (NO in S2111), whether or not the time (timing) to close the big prize gate has come, that is, the predetermined opening time after opening the big prize gate (see FIG. 6) (S2112). Then, if the opening time of the big winning slot has not passed (NO in S2112), the process ends.

On the other hand, if the specified number of balls has been entered (YES in S2111), or if the opening time of the big winning opening has passed (YES in S2112), one of the two round end conditions is met. If so, the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30 or second big winning opening 35) is closed (S2113). Then, the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2114), and it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter is "0" (S2115). If it is determined not to be "0" (NO in S2115), the process ends to start the next round. Also, when closing the big winning opening (the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35), that is, when ending the round, the round end command of the corresponding round is set. For example, a round end command capable of specifying the round to end is set, such as "1R end command" for the end of the first round and "2R end command" for the end of the second round. The set round end command is transmitted to the sub-controller 90 by the output processing of S201. In addition, the round end command is transmitted when the round except for the final round of the jackpot game ends, that is, when it is determined that the value of the round counter is not "0" in S2115. For example, if the number of rounds of the jackpot game to be executed is 15R jackpot game, the round end command is transmitted until the end of 14R, but is not transmitted at the end of 15R. This is because an ending command to be set in the process of S2116, which will be described later, is transmitted at the end of the final round.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the round counter is "0" (YES in S2115), as a jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game, a jackpot ending command is set (S2116), and a jackpot ending effect is started. (S2117). Then, the jackpot end flag is set (S2118), and the process ends. The round counter becomes "0" when the large winning opening is opened 15 times in the case of a long hit (15R jackpot), and the opening of the big winning opening is performed twice in the case of a short hit (2R jackpot). It becomes "0" when executed.

In S2116, out of a plurality of predetermined ending commands, the game state when the current jackpot (jackpot that has reached the end) occurs, the type of the jackpot game this time, the game state after the jackpot game, etc. An ending command is selected and the selected command is set. The type of ending command set in this manner determines the ending period (ending time) to be executed (set). The ending period is a period that is set after all opening operations (round games) of the big winning openings 30 in the jackpot game are completed and before variable display of special symbols (effect symbols) can be executed. , also referred to as the “Termination Period”. During the ending period (end period), the big winning opening 30 is closed. The effect executed during the "end period" is also called "end effect (ending effect)".

The types of ending commands set in S2116 are as follows. First, the game state at the time of the occurrence of the jackpot is a low-probability/low-probability base state (no low-probability short working hours), and the type of the jackpot is the 15R first jackpot, the 15R second jackpot, the 15R fifth jackpot, or the 15R sixth jackpot. And, if the V flag is ON, that is, if the high probability state (high probability high base state) after the jackpot game, the ending command (" Also called "first ending command"). On the other hand, when the game state and the jackpot type at the time of the jackpot occurrence are the same as this, and the V flag is OFF, that is, when the jackpot game is in a low probability high base state (time saving state), 8000 ms An ending command (also referred to as a “second ending command”) for executing an ending period (second ending period) is set.

This is because in the case of the 15R first jackpot, the 15R second jackpot, the 15R fifth jackpot or the 15R sixth jackpot, if the game ball passes V during the jackpot game, the game state after the jackpot game is highly probable in the ending period. An effect (first specific effect) that indicates to the player that it will be in the state (variable probability mode) is executed, and in the case of V non-passing (passing through the non-specific area), in the ending period, in the time saving state (time saving mode) This is due to the execution of an effect (second specific effect) that indicates that the game will become (indicate to the player that a low probability state will occur or not to indicate to the player that a high probability state will occur). In addition, in the present embodiment, the first specific effect that indicates to the player that the transition to the high probability state is performed is a relatively long-time effect, indicating to the player that the transition to the time saving state (high probability state is (not shown to the player) The second specific effect is a relatively short-time effect. As described above, in this embodiment, it is necessary to execute ending periods of different lengths depending on the result of passing through the specific area in the V round (whether the V flag is ON or OFF). Ending periods of different lengths can be set according to the results. As a result, the sub-control unit that has received the ending command can execute an ending effect with a different effect mode and effect period (effect time) according to the ending period (according to the game state after the big hit game). Become. However, since the 15R second jackpot and the 15R sixth jackpot are "V non-passing scheduled jackpots", the possibility of the game ball passing through the specific area 39 during the jackpot game is extremely low.

Here, in the V round (in the jackpot game), the information indicating whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area is also referred to as "specific area information". The specific area information includes information indicating that the game ball passed through the specific area in the V round and information indicating that the game ball did not pass through the specific area in the V round, and determines the ending period. The ending period determining means (ending period determining means) can determine the ending period based on this specific area information.

In addition, the game state when the big hit occurs is a low-base state (no low-probability short-time work, no high-probability short-time work) or a high-base state (with low-probability short-time work, high-probability short-time work), and the jackpot type is the 15R third big hit. In the case of , an ending period (third ending period) of 6000 ms is executed regardless of whether the V flag is ON or OFF (regardless of the specific area passage information (ON/OFF of the V flag)). Set a command (also called a "third ending command"). This is because, in the case of the 15R 3rd jackpot, as a general rule, V will not pass during the jackpot game (the possibility is extremely low), and the base state will always be low after the jackpot game. This is because the performance mode (performance mode) is set to the "normal mode" which is the initial mode executed after the power is turned on. That is, in the ending effect executed in the ending period related to the 15R 3rd big hit, "the effect of shifting to the normal mode" (third specific effect) is performed, so the ending period to be set will not be changed depending on the result of passing through the specific area. It is However, "normal mode" is a production mode indicating a low-probability-low base state in principle, but even if it is set to "normal mode" after the jackpot game is over, (although the possibility is low) a high-probability-low base It may be in a state However, since the 15R third jackpot is a "V non-passing scheduled jackpot", it is very difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area during the jackpot game. Also, the third ending period is shorter than the first ending period and the second ending period. Since the low-probability-low-base state is the most disadvantageous game state among the game states set after the big win game, providing a long period of time to notify the transition to such a game state may reduce the player's willingness to play. may decrease. In particular, when the "15R 3rd jackpot" is achieved in the high-probability-low base state or the high-base state, the tendency is remarkable because the advantageous state shifts to the disadvantageous state (normal state). For this reason, a short ending period is set so that the game progresses quickly.

In addition, the game state when the big hit occurs is a low probability high base state (with low probability short working hours) or a high probability high base state (with high probability short working hours), and the type of the big hit is 15R first big hit, 15R second big hit , 15R 5th jackpot or 15R 6th jackpot, even if the V flag is ON or OFF (regardless of the specific area passing information (ON/OFF of the V flag)), 4000 ms ending An ending command (also referred to as "fourth ending command") for executing a period (fourth ending period) is set. The fourth ending period (4000ms) is shorter than the first to third ending periods (17000ms, 8000ms, 6000ms) (shortest period). , 15R 2nd jackpot, 15R 5th jackpot and 15R 6th jackpot are all so-called ``consecutive middle'' jackpots in which the game state after the jackpot game is again a high base state. This is to expedite the progress.

Here, even if the length of the fourth ending period is the same 4000 ms, the content of the ending effect (effect mode) differs depending on the specific area passage information (ON/OFF of the V flag). Different ending commands are set depending on whether the corresponding fourth ending period is executed or when the fourth ending period corresponding to the V flag OFF is executed. That is, when an ending command (also referred to as "fourth ending command A") for executing a fourth ending period corresponding to the ON of the V flag is set, the corresponding ending effect will ensure that the game state after the big win game is reached. An effect (fourth specific effect A) is executed to indicate to the player that the high base state (probability variable mode) is reached. On the other hand, when an ending command (also referred to as a "fourth ending command B") for executing a fourth ending period corresponding to the V flag OFF is set, the corresponding ending effect will ensure that the game state after the big win game is low. An effect (fourth specific effect B) that indicates to the player that it will be in a high base state (time saving mode) is executed. Therefore, the fourth specific performance A after the big hit game related to the 15R big win in the high-probability-high base state is a performance showing the continuation of the variable probability, and the fourth specific performance B is the performance showing the end of the variable probability (entering into a short time). In addition, the fourth specific performance A after the big hit game related to the 15R big win in the low probability high base state is a performance showing variable probability entry, and the fourth specific performance B is a production showing time reduction continuation.

In addition, the game state when the big hit occurs is a low base state (no low probability of short working hours, no high probability of short working hours) or a high base state (with low probability of short working hours, with high probability of short working hours), and the jackpot type is the 2R 4th big hit. , the common ending period (fifth ending period) of 8000 ms is executed regardless of whether the V flag is ON or OFF (regardless of the specific area passage information (V flag ON/OFF)). An ending command (also referred to as a "fifth ending command") is set. In the case of the 2R fourth jackpot, this is a mode in which it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the special symbol success/failure determination probability (jackpot probability) is high or low in the performance mode (performance mode) after the end of the big win game. This is because the probability non-announcement state (simply referred to as “non-announcement mode”) is set to . That is, in the ending effect executed in the ending period related to the 2R fourth big hit, regardless of whether the V flag is ON or OFF (V passage/non-passage), "effect indicating entering non-notification mode" (fifth specific production), the ending period set according to the result of passing through the specific area is not changed. In this embodiment, the second ending period and the fifth ending period have the same length (8000 ms), but instead, the first ending period and the fifth ending period have the same length (1700 ms) may be set.

At S2116, one of the above ending commands is set. The set ending command is transmitted to the sub-controller 90 at a predetermined timing by the output process (S201). The sub-control unit 90 that has received the ending command executes a predetermined ending effect based on the ending command.

Also, when it is determined that the jackpot end flag is ON in S2105 (YES in S2105), since the final round has ended, it is determined whether or not the execution time (ending time) of the jackpot ending production has elapsed. (S2119) If the ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2119), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ending time has passed (YES in S2119), after turning OFF the jackpot end flag (S2120), the later-described game state setting process (S2121) is performed. Then, the jackpot flag is turned OFF (S2122), the special figure operation status is set to "1" (S2123), and the process is finished. As a result, in the next interrupt processing, the special symbol standby processing (S1102) is executed again as the special symbol operation processing (S207). It can be said that the game control microcomputer 81 that executes the above special electric accessory processing 1 (S1108) functions as a "special game execution means".

[Game state setting process]
As shown in FIG. 34, in the game state setting process (S2121), first, it is determined whether or not the V flag is ON (S2201). The V flag is a flag that is turned on in the specific area sensor detection process (FIG. 36), which will be described later. Then, if the V flag is ON (YES in S2201), the variable probability flag is turned ON (S2202), the variable probability counter is set to "100" (S2203), the V flag is turned OFF (S2204), and S2205 Proceed to processing. On the other hand, if the V flag is OFF (NO in S2201), the process proceeds to S2205 without turning ON the variable probability flag. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is determined whether or not the game state after the big win game is set to the high probability state based on whether or not the V flag is ON in the game state setting process. .

In S2205, it is determined whether or not the finished jackpot game (jackpot game executed this time) is a 15R jackpot. Then, if it is determined to be a 15R big hit (YES at S2205), it is determined whether or not the 15R big hit is the 15R third big hit (S2206), and if it is a 15R third big hit (YES at S2206), that is the case. After finishing the process, if it is not the 15R 3rd jackpot, that is, if it is one of the 15R 1st, 2nd and 5th jackpots (NO in S2206), the time saving flag is turned ON (S2207), and the time saving counter is set to "100" ” is set (S2208), and the process ends. Here, if the current jackpot game is related to the 15R first jackpot or the 15R fifth jackpot, the game ball passes through the specific region 39 (V passage) during the jackpot game and the V flag is turned ON. Since it should be there (YES in S2201), the game state after the end of the big hit game in this case becomes a high probability high base state. Also, if the current jackpot game is related to the 15R second jackpot, the V flag should not be turned ON during the jackpot game (NO in S2201), so after the jackpot game ends in this case The game state of becomes a low certainty high base state. Also, if the current jackpot game is related to the 15R third jackpot, the V flag should not be turned ON during the jackpot game (NO in S2201), so after the jackpot game ends in this case The game state of becomes a low probability low base state.

On the other hand, in S2205, when it is determined that the finished jackpot game (jackpot game executed this time) is not the 15R jackpot, that is, the 2R fourth jackpot (NO in S2205), the game state before the start of this jackpot game, namely It is determined whether or not the gaming state at the time of the 2R fourth big hit was the time saving state (S2209), and when it is determined that it was not the time saving state (NO in S2209), the time saving flag is not turned ON and processed as it is. finish. As a result, when the V flag is not turned ON in this big hit game (NO in S2201), the game state after the end of the big hit game becomes a low probability low base state, and the V flag is turned ON in this big hit game. In the case (YES in S2201), the game state after the end of the big hit game becomes a high probability low base state.

On the other hand, in S2209, when it is determined that the gaming state when the 2R fourth big hit was the time saving state (YES in S2209), the time saving flag is turned ON (S2207), and "100" is set to the time saving counter. (S2208), and the process ends. As a result, when the V flag does not turn ON in this big hit game (NO in S2201), the game state after the end of the big hit game becomes a low probability high base state, and the V flag turns ON in this big hit game. In the case (YES in S2201), the game state after the end of the big hit game becomes a high probability high base state.

In addition, the high probability high base state, the low probability high base state and the high probability low base state are any of the conditions that the special symbol fluctuates 100 times and that the next big hit occurs. It ends when it is established.

In addition, the processing (S2209) for determining whether the gaming state before the start of the big hit game related to the 2R fourth big hit is the time saving state is performed by setting the operating state of the time saving function and the high base function before and after the big hit game to the small hit. This is to make the state (condition) the same as when If these operating states are different between the case of the 2R fourth big win and the case of the small win, even if it is difficult to recognize which hit is the opening pattern of the big winning opening, the subsequent game state (time saving function and This is because depending on the operating state of the high base function, it becomes possible to easily determine which hit is. As a result, the 2R fourth big win and the small win are made difficult to discriminate by the opening pattern of the big prize winning opening, and also by the operating state of the time saving function and the high base generating function after that.

When the game state after the end of the big win game is determined as described above, a game state designation command for designating the game state after the end of the big win game is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S2210). That is, when the probability variation flag is turned ON in S2202 and the time saving flag is turned ON in S2207, the "probability specification command" is set, and when only the time saving flag is turned ON without turning the probability variation flag ON, " If you set the "time saving designation command" and turn ON only the variable probability flag without turning ON the time saving flag, set the "latency designation command", and if you do not turn ON both the probability changing flag and the time saving flag Set "normally specified command". The game state designation command set at S2210 is sent to the sub-control board 90 by output processing (S201).

[Special electric accessory processing 2 (small winning game)]
As shown in FIG. 35, in the special electric auditors processing 2 (S1109), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit end flag is ON (S2301). The small-hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second big winning opening 35 has ended in the small-hit game. If the small hit end flag is not ON (NO in S2301), it is determined whether or not the second big winning opening 35 is open (S2302). If it is not open (NO in S2302), whether or not the time (timing) for opening the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30 or second big winning hole 35) has come, that is, the opening time for the small win has passed. Then, it is determined whether it is time to start the first opening, or whether it is time to start the next opening after the time interval between multiple times of opening has elapsed (S2303). If the judgment result of S2303 is NO, the process is finished as it is. On the other hand, if the determination result of S2303 is YES, after performing V invalid period setting processing (S2304), proceed to S2305, in order to open the second big winning opening 35 according to the small hit opening pattern (see FIG. 6) The second big winning device 36 is activated. In this embodiment, the opening period (opening time) of the small win is set to 8000 ms (8 seconds) like that of the big win.

In the V invalid period setting process (S2304), the detection of the gaming ball by the specific area sensor 39a is invalidated during the opening of the second big winning hole 35 in the small winning game and for several seconds after the closing of the second big winning hole 35. A period (second period) for determination is set. In this embodiment, the period other than the period determined as the valid period in the V valid period setting process (S2109) is set as the invalid period (second period). Therefore, in this V invalid period setting process, it is confirmed whether the valid period is not reached, that is, whether the invalid period is set. Specifically, it is checked whether the V timer, which counts down the elapse of the V effective period, is set to "0" (that is, the state of no effective period). If the V timer is not "0", it is set to "0". It should be noted that the V timer may be set to "0" without checking whether the V timer is "0", that is, set to a state of no effective period. Thus, even if there is V passage during the small winning game, if the game state before starting the small winning game is the normal state, the game state after finishing the small winning game does not shift to the high probability state. In this embodiment, the period other than the valid period set in the V valid period setting process (S2109) is the invalid period, so the process of S2304 may be omitted.

If the second big winning hole 35 is open in S2302, (YES in S2302), the number of balls entering the second big winning hole 35 during two times of opening, that is, the game ball entered in two times of opening has reached the specified maximum number of incoming balls (10 in this embodiment) (S2306). If the specified number of balls has not been entered (NO in S2306), it is determined whether or not it is time to close the second large prize winning port 35, that is, the predetermined opening time (Fig. 6 See) has passed (S2307). Then, if the opening time of the second big winning hole 35 has not passed (NO in S2307), the process is finished.

On the other hand, if the number of balls entering the second big prize-winning port 35 during the second opening has reached the specified number of balls (YES in S2306), the second big prize-winning port 35 is closed (S2314). , S2311 to move to small hit end processing. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2307 that the opening time of the second big winning opening 35 has passed (YES in S2307), the second big winning opening 35 is closed (S2308). Then, the value of the open counter for small hits is decremented by 1 (S2309), and it is determined whether or not the value of the open counter for small hits is "0" (S2310). If it is determined that it is not "0" in S2310 (NO in S2310), the next opening will be started, so the process will end as it is.

On the other hand, when it determines with it being "0" by S2310 (it is YES by S2310), it transfers to the small hit completion|finish process of S2311. In S2311, as a small-hit ending process for ending the small-hit game, a small-hit ending command is set (S2311), and a small-hit ending effect is started (S2312). Then, a small hit end flag is set (S2313), and the process ends. It should be noted that the small winning opening counter becomes "0" when the second big winning opening 35 is opened twice.

In S2301, if the small hit end flag is ON (YES in S2301), since the opening has been completed twice, it is determined whether or not the ending time of the small hit has passed (S2315), and the ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2315), the process ends. On the other hand, if the ending time has passed (YES in S2315), turn off the small hit end flag (S2316), turn off the small hit flag (S2317), and set the special figure operation status to "1" set (S2318) and terminate the process. As a result, in the next interrupt processing, the special symbol standby processing (S1102) is executed again as the special symbol operation processing (S207).

It should be noted that the variable probability flag and the time saving flag are not switched from ON to OFF at the start of the small winning game. Also, when the small winning game ends, the game state setting process (S2121, FIG. 36) is not performed. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game state is not changed before and after execution of the small winning game. It can be said that the game control microcomputer 81 that executes the above special electric accessary product processing 2 (S1109) functions as a "small profit special game executing means".

[Specific area sensor detection process]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the specific area sensor detection process (S208) next to the special figure operation process (S207). As shown in FIG. 36, in the specific area sensor detection process (S208), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has been detected by the specific area sensor 39a (S2401). ) and terminate the process. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2401 that there is detection (YES in S2401), it is determined whether or not it is during the V valid period (S2402). The V valid period is a period set in the V valid period setting process (S2109) in the special electric accessory process 1 (S1108) described above. In this embodiment, the V validity period is set in the first round and the second round in the jackpot game.

Also, if it is determined in S2402 that it is in the V valid period (YES in S2402), the V flag is turned ON (S2403), and whether or not the big hit game currently being executed is the 2R big hit (2R fourth big hit) (S2404). Then, if it is determined that it is not a 2R big hit (NO in S2404), that is, if it is a 15R big hit, the 1st V passage command is set (S2405), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined to be a 2R big hit (YES in S2404), the second V passage command is set (S2406), and the process ends. The CPU of the main control board 80 transmits this V passing command to the sub-control board 90 at a predetermined timing, and the sub-control board 90 executes the game performance in the performance symbol display area or the like according to the type of the received V passing command. .

If it is determined in S2402 that the V valid period is not in effect (NO in S2402), the third V passing command is set without turning ON the V flag (S2407), and the process ends. The first V-pass command is a command for causing the sub-control board 90 to perform notification control of V-pass. On the other hand, the second V-passing command and the third V-passing command are commands for in principle not allowing the sub-control board 90 to perform V-passing notification control. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the specific area sensor detection process (S208) and the V effective period setting process (S2109), thereby switching between valid and invalid for passing the game ball to the specific area 39. It functions as (specific area state switching means).

[Processing of number of pending balls]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the specific area sensor detection process (S208) and then the pending ball number process (S209). As shown in FIG. 37, in the reserved ball number processing (S209), first, the special figure 1 reserved ball number stored in the RAM of the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81), special figure 2 reserved ball number and The number of normal design holding balls is read (S2501). Then, the data of the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls command for transmitting the information of the number of reserved balls to the sub-control board 90, etc.) is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S2502). The data related to the number of pending balls (number of pending balls command) is output by the output process (S201) in the next interrupt process (S105), and the data related to the number of pending balls (number of pending balls command) is output for each interrupt process. to the output buffer (S2502) and output processing (S201) are sequentially performed.

When the sub-control unit 90 that has received this pending ball number command determines that the special figure pending ball number has increased or decreased based on the received pending ball number command, the display screen of the lower image display device 71 accordingly. The display contents of the effect pending display area (first effect pending display area 9c, second effect pending display area 9d) in 71a are updated. Specifically, for example, when the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is increased by 1 from "3" to "4", the first effect reservation 9a corresponding to the increased number of special figure 1 reserved balls "4" It is additionally displayed in the first effect pending display area 9c. Also, when the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is reduced by 1 from "2" to "1" (that is, when the first special figure reservation is digested), the left end of the first effect reservation display area 9c (special figure 1 reservation The location corresponding to the number of balls "1", see FIG. 3) is erased, or moved to the variable suspension display area (not shown) and displayed. , the first effect suspension 9a displayed in the first effect suspension display area 9c is moved (shifted) by one to the left. On the other hand, the display content of the second effect reservation 9b (second special figure reservation) can be updated in the same manner as the first effect reservation 9a (first special figure reservation).

In addition, regarding the data of the number of special reserved balls when the number of special reserved balls is added, that is, the data of the number of special reserved balls associated with the occurrence of the start ball (start winning), the above-mentioned start ball command Alternatively, the number of reserved balls command indicating the number of special reserved balls after the addition (after starting entering ball) may be set in the output buffer together with the starting entering ball command. In addition, regarding the data of the number of reserved balls when the number of reserved balls is subtracted, that is, the data of the number of reserved balls associated with the start of fluctuation of special symbols (digestion of special reserved balls), the above-mentioned fluctuation start command It may be set in the output buffer together with the fluctuation start command including or holding number of balls command indicating the number of special figure holding balls after subtraction (after special figure holding digestion).

[Power off monitoring process]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a power interruption monitoring process (S210) following the pending ball number process (S209). As shown in FIG. 38, in the power-off monitoring process (S210), it is first determined whether or not a power-off signal is input (S2601), and if there is no input (NO in S2601), the process ends. On the other hand, if there is a power-off signal input (YES in S2601), the current state of the gaming machine etc.) is stored in the RAM (S2602), the power-off flag is turned ON (S2603), and then loop processing is performed without returning to the interrupt processing (FIG. 11).

[Sub-control main processing]
Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 48. FIG. Incidentally, counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. appearing in the description of the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91). The effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 reads and executes a sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 39 from the ROM of the sub-control board 90 when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on. As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main processing, CPU initialization processing is first performed (S4001). In CPU initialization processing (S4001), stack setting, constant setting, CPU setting, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) setting, various flags, status and counter resetting are performed.

Subsequently, in S4002, it is determined whether or not the power-off signal is ON and the contents of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (performance control microcomputer 91) are normal (S4002). As a result, if the contents of the RAM are not normal (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (production control microcomputer 91) is initialized (S4003), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if the contents of the RAM are normal (YES in S4002), the process proceeds to S4004 without initializing the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91). That is, if the power-off signal is not ON, or if the contents of the RAM are not normal even if the power-off signal is ON (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (production control microcomputer 91) is initialized. However, if the power failure signal is turned ON due to a power failure or the like but the contents of the RAM are maintained normally (YES in S4002), the RAM is not initialized. Initializing the RAM resets the values of various flags, statuses and counters. It should be noted that the processing of S4001 to S4003 is executed only once after the power is turned on (when the power is turned on), and is not executed thereafter. In this embodiment, the performance control microcomputer 91 also performs the same processing as the power interruption monitoring processing (S210) by the game control microcomputer 81 shown in FIG. Then, data relating to effect control at that time is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 . That is, the data related to the effect control at the time of power failure such as power failure is backed up. Therefore, unless the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003) when the power is turned on after recovering from a power failure such as a power failure (recovering from a power failure), the effect control by the effect control microcomputer 91 The state of returns to the state before the power failure occurred.

In S4004, interrupts are prohibited. Next, random number seed update processing is executed (S4005). In the random number seed update process (S4005), the values of various effect determination random number counters are updated. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91). In addition, the random number for determining the effect includes the random number for determining the variable effect that determines the mode (variable effect pattern) of the effect pattern game effect to be executed, the random number for determining the previous notice effect that determines the previous notice effect, and the effect pattern determination that determines the effect pattern. There are random numbers for use. The random number update method can be the same method as the random number update process performed by the main control board 80 described above. Instead of adding 1 to the random value at the time of updating, it is also possible to add 2 at a time. The effect determination random number is acquired at a predetermined timing. As this timing, for example, when a control signal (starting ball command) is sent from the main control board 80 to notify that there is a starting ball, or when the main control board 80 sends a control signal ( When a variation start command) is transmitted, or when determining a variation effect pattern described later. The storage location of the obtained effect determination random number is a predetermined random number counter value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (effect control microcomputer 91).

When the random number seed update process (S4005) ends, the command transmission process is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process, various commands (control signals) stored in the output buffer (hereinafter also referred to as "sub output buffer") in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (production control microcomputer 91) are sent to the image control board. 100 , audio control board 106 and lamp control board 107 . Each control board (each control unit) that has received the command operates various production devices (image display devices 71 and 72, speaker 67, board lamp 5, frame lamp 66, frame movable decorative member 13 and board movable decoration) in accordance with the received command. (member 14, etc.) are used to perform various effects (such as effect symbol game effects, special game effects associated with big win games and small win games, etc.). The effect control microcomputer 91 subsequently permits an interrupt (S4007). After that, S4004 to S4007 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, reception interrupt processing (S4008), 2 ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), and 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4010) can be executed. By executing these control processes, on the display screen of the image display device (production design display area 7b, small production design display area 8b, fluctuation number display area 77, fourth design display area 78, production suspension display area, background It is possible to control the display of the production pattern 8, the small production pattern 8a, the number of times image 77a, etc. in the display area), control the lighting of various lamps, control the operation of the movable decorative members, control the sound output from the speaker 67, etc. becomes.

[Receive interrupt processing]
In the reception interrupt process (S4008), as shown in FIG. 40, whether or not the strobe signal (STB signal) is ON, that is, the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 is the external INT input of the effect control microcomputer 91. It is determined whether or not input has been made to the part (S4101). If it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is not ON (NO in S4101), the process ends. On the other hand, in S4101, if it is determined that the strobe signal is ON (YES in S4101), the various commands sent from the main control board 80 are stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (production control microcomputer 91). (S4102), the process ends. This reception interrupt process (S4008) is a process that is executed with priority over other interrupt processes (S4009, S4010).

[2 ms timer interrupt processing]
The 2ms timer interrupt process (S4009) is a process executed each time an interrupt pulse with a period of 2msec (hereinafter, "msec" is simply referred to as "ms") is input to the sub-control board 90. FIG. As shown in FIG. 41, in the 2ms timer interrupt process (S4009), first, based on the detection signals from the effect button detection switches 63c and 63d, an input process for creating switch data (edge data and level data) is performed (S4201). . Subsequently, a lamp data output process for outputting the lamp data created by the 10 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed (S4202). In the lamp data output process (S4202), the lamps such as the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 are mainly caused to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode or turn off in accordance with the execution of various effects such as a variable effect, a notice effect, and a special game effect. lamp data corresponding to the light emission mode is output. Next, drive data output processing, which will be described later, is performed to output the drive data created by the 10 ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later (S4203). In the drive data output process (S4203), the frame movable decorative member 13 and the board movable decorative member 14 are mainly driven in a predetermined drive mode (operation mode) in accordance with the execution of various effects such as a variable effect, a notice effect, and a special game effect. When driving (operating), driving (return driving, A flag (return drive flag) that can specify that it is the first drive is set. Then, watchdog timer processing for resetting the watchdog timer is performed (S4204). Incidentally, it can be said that the effect control microcomputer 91 that executes the lamp data output processing (S4202) and the driving data output processing (S4203) functions as a "driving executing means".

[10 ms timer interrupt processing]
The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) is a process that is executed each time an interrupt pulse with a period of 10 ms is input to the sub-control board 90. FIG. As shown in FIG. 42, in the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010), first, drive limit process (S4301) and received command analysis process (S4302), which will be described later, are performed. Then, switch state acquisition processing is performed to store the switch data created in the 2ms timer interrupt process described above as switch data for the 10ms timer interrupt process in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (production control microcomputer 91) (S4303). Based on the switch data stored in the switch state acquisition process, a switch process for setting the display contents of the display screen 7a is performed (S4304). After that, other processes such as updating the random number for effect determination are executed (S4305).

[Drive limit processing]
As shown in FIG. 43, in the drive restriction process (S4301), first, it is determined whether or not it is time to start variable display of special symbols (S4310). In other words, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the variable effect (variable display of the effect pattern 8). This determination can be made, for example, by confirming whether or not a variation start command transmitted from the main control board 80 is received when the variation display of the special symbols is started. As a result, if it is determined that it is not time to start the variable display (NO in S4310), this processing ends without performing the processing after S4311, and if it is determined that it is time to start the variable display (YES in S4310), return It is determined whether or not the drive flag is ON (S4311).

Here, the return drive flag is switched ON/OFF in the drive data output process (S4203), which will be described later. Specifically, as drive data (frame drive data) for driving the frame movable decorative member 13, drive data ( It is turned ON when the output of the driving data of the first driving mode) is started, and is turned OFF when the output of the driving data is completed (that is, the return operation is completed). Therefore, when the return drive flag is ON, the drive status of the frame movable decorative member 13 (the effect movable body 13b, the electric drive source) corresponds to the drive data for the return operation (drive data of the first drive mode). Therefore, it is in a driving state (a specific state), that is, in a returning operation.

If it is determined in S4311 that the return drive flag is not ON (is OFF) (NO in S4311), this process ends without performing the process of S4312, and if it is determined to be ON (return operation is in progress) (YES in S4311), the drive limit flag is turned ON (S4312), and this processing is finished. The drive restriction flag is a flag for setting a state (restricted state) in which the drive of a predetermined electrical component among the various electrical components for presentation provided in the pachinko game machine 1 is restricted. In this embodiment, when setting various production patterns (production patterns) related to variable production, advance notice production, etc. in the variable production start process (S4402), which will be described later, the drive limit flag is referred to, and at that time the drive is limited. When the flag is ON, the drive of a predetermined electric component among the electric components for performance that can operate in accordance with the variable performance or advance notice performance based on the performance pattern is restricted. Examples of drive restriction mode (driving restriction mode) include stopping the driving of a predetermined electrical component (driving disabled) (driving stop mode), reducing the driving amount and the number of times of driving the predetermined electrical component, and decreasing the driving speed. For example, it is possible to adopt a drive mode (power saving drive mode) in which the drive is performed with less power than normal (unrestricted state). In this embodiment, the frame lamp 66 (frame LED) is used as an electrical component (target for drive restriction) whose driving can be restricted.

The drive limit flag that is turned ON in S4312 corresponds to the variable display that triggered the ON, that is, the end of the variable display that was determined to be the time to start the variable display in S4310 (for example, the reception of the variable stop command). ) is turned off. In other words, it is possible to set a restricted state for one variation display of the special symbol (in one variation unit). As a result, when the variable display of the special symbols is started during the return operation, the power consumption of the game machine (electrical parts) is reduced by limiting the driving of the predetermined electric parts until the variable display is finished. (driving electric energy) can be suppressed, and it is also possible to prevent the limit state from being continuously set over a plurality of fluctuation displays. It should be noted that releasing the restriction state (turning off the drive restriction flag) at the end of the variable display means that the restriction on the driving of the frame lamp 66 (frame LED) is lifted during the variable display (during the variable effect). A change in the drive mode of the frame lamp 66 (frame LED) during the variable effect, that is, a sudden change in the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 (frame LED) may cause the player to feel uncomfortable. This is to avoid It can be said that the effect control microcomputer 91 that executes the above drive limit processing (S4301) functions as "drive limit means".

[Receive command analysis processing]
As shown in FIG. 44, in the received command analysis process (S4302), first, it is determined whether or not a start entry command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4395). If it is determined (NO in S4395), the process proceeds to S4401, and if it is determined that the starting ball command has been received (YES in S4395), effect pending information storage processing (S4400) is performed, and the process proceeds to S4401. do. Effect pending information storage processing (S4400), various information (prior determination results, jackpot type determination random Numbers, game information such as fluctuation pattern random numbers), depending on the type of special design (1st special design, 2nd special design) and the number of special design pending balls at the time of sending and receiving the start ball command (at the time of command generation) , is stored in a predetermined effect pending information storage area of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91) in a shift memory format. For example, if the received starting ball command is a special figure 1 starting ball command corresponding to the number of pending balls "4" of special figure 1, the pre-determination result and hit type included in the special figure 1 starting ball command Such information is stored as special figure 1 effect reserved information in an area corresponding to the number of reservations 4 out of the special figure 1 effect reserved information storage area. The effect pending information stored in this manner can be used for execution of various effects such as a variable effect, an advance notice effect, and an effect mode, which will be described later. The storage contents (effect pending information) of the effect pending information storage area in the sub control board 90 are the special figure pending storage units (first special figure pending storage unit, second special figure It matches the storage contents (obtained information) of the reserved storage unit). For this reason, the effect pending information storage area of the sub-control board 90 can also be said to be "obtained information storage means".

Next, in S4401, it is determined whether or not a variation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4401), and if it is determined that a variation start command has been received (YES in S4401), variation production start processing ( S4402) is performed, the process proceeds to S4404, and when it is determined that the variation start command is not received (NO in S4401), the process proceeds to S4404 without performing the variation production start process. In S4404, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation stop command is received from the main control board 80 (S4404), and if it is determined that the fluctuation stop command is received (YES in S4404), the fluctuation effect end processing (S4405) described later is executed. When it is determined that the change stop command is not received (NO in S4404), the process proceeds to S4406 without performing the change effect end process.

Subsequently, in S4406, it is determined whether or not a big hit game-related command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4406). Here, the big-hit game-related command is a command transmitted from the main control board 80 upon execution of the big-hit game. A round start command transmitted at the start of a round, a round end command transmitted at the end of a round, and an ending command transmitted at the end of a jackpot game are applicable. In S4406, it is determined whether or not any of these jackpot game-related commands have been received, and if received (YES in S4406), the received jackpot game-related command is an opening command. (S4407). If it is an opening command (YES in S4407), reset (initialize) the variation counter (S4408), perform jackpot game-related effect processing (S4409), and if it is not an opening command (NO in S4407), reset the variation counter. Without (initialization), big hit game related effect processing (S4409) is performed. On the other hand, if no jackpot game-related command is received from the main control board 80 (NO in S4406), the process of S4412 (FIG. 45) is performed without resetting the variation counter (S4408) or jackpot game-related effect processing (S4409). ).

Here, the variation counter is means (counting means) for counting the number of executions of variation display of special symbols (variation display count). (Each time the special symbol is stopped and displayed), 1 is added in the fluctuation performance end processing (S4405) to be described later. In this embodiment, the variation counter counts the number of variations displayed when the game state is the low base state. Therefore, the variable display count counted by the variable counter corresponds to the variable display count of the first special symbol in principle. The display of the number of times image 77a (display of the number of times of fluctuation display) in the fluctuation number display area 77 of the upper image display device 72 (display screen 72a) is performed based on the count value of the fluctuation counter. ing. In other words, it shows the number of variable display times of the first special symbol in the low base state. In this embodiment, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed in the low base state (when the command to stop the variation of the second special symbol is received), the variation display is counted by the variation counter. , and is used as a display target of the number of times of variable display by the number of times image 77a.

The trigger for resetting (initializing) the variation counter is not limited to the reception of the opening command (that is, the start of the jackpot game). It is also possible to receive an ending command (that is, to end the jackpot game). In addition, in this embodiment, reset (initialize) the variation counter based on power-on of the pachinko game machine 1 and RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch) of the sub-control board 90 (production control microcomputer 91). and Furthermore, the trigger for updating the fluctuation counter (the trigger for counting up) is not limited to reception of a fluctuation stop command, but may be reception of a fluctuation start command, for example.

In the jackpot game-related effect processing (S4409), for example, if the received command is an opening command, an opening effect command specifying an opening effect corresponding to the type of the jackpot identified based on the command is set in the sub-output buffer. , if it is a round start command, a round production command specifying a round production corresponding to the round specified based on the command is set in the sub output buffer, and if it is an ending command, the jackpot specified based on the command is set. An ending effect command designating an ending effect corresponding to the type is set in the sub-output buffer. When various production commands related to the set jackpot are transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission processing (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 immediately updates the progress of the jackpot game based on the received command. A performance related to the big win game (big win game related performance) such as opening performance and round performance is executed on the display screen of the image display device. In addition, the frequency image 77a (variation display frequency) is not displayed during execution of the jackpot game-related effect.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 45, in S4412, it is determined whether or not the first V passage command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4412). ), set the V passage notification command in the sub-output buffer (4413), and proceed to the processing of S4414. In addition, the 1st V passage command is a command for notifying the sub-control board 90 from the main control board 80 that the game ball has been detected by the specific area sensor 39a during the V valid period in the 15R 1st and 5th big hits. . When the V passage notification command is transmitted to the image control board 100 (image control unit) or the like in the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 reads predetermined image information from the ROM of the image control board 100. , characters such as "V passed!" As a result, the game ball passes through the specific area 39, and the player is informed that the game state after the end of the big win game will be in a high probability state. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4412 that the first V passage command has not been received (NO in S4412), the process proceeds to S4414 without setting the V passage notification command.

In addition, displaying the character "V pass!" (for example, by displaying the characters of ) to notify that the V has passed. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the game state after the jackpot game (special game) being executed will be in a high probability state. Further, the display screen 72a of the upper image display device 72 may display characters such as "V pass!" Both of the screens 72a may be used for V passage notification.

Subsequently, in S4414, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the second V passing command (set at S2406) is received from the main control board 80 (S4413), and determines that the second V passing command has not been received. If so (NO in S4414), the process proceeds to S4415 to determine whether or not the third V passing command has been received (S4415). Then, when it is determined in S4414 that the second V passage command has been received (YES in S4414) and when it is determined in S4415 that the third V passage command has been received (YES in S4415), V passage non-notification is performed. The command is set in the sub-output buffer (S4416), and the process proceeds to S4417. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4415 that the third V passage command has not been received (NO in S4415), the process proceeds to S4417 without setting the V passage non-notification command.

Here, the 2nd V passage command is a command for notifying the sub control board 90 from the main control board 80 that the game ball has been detected by the specific area sensor 39a during the V valid period in the 2R fourth big hit. Moreover, the 3rd V passage command is a command for notifying the sub-control board 90 from the main control board 80 that the game ball has been detected by the specific area sensor 39a during the V invalid period such as during a small hit.

When the V passage non-notification command is transmitted to the image control board 100 or the like in the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 causes the display screen of the image display device to indicate V passage such as "V passage!" Display control is performed on a screen that does not display characters, etc. to notify. In other words, the V passage non-notification mode is set. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the specific area 39 in the 2R fourth big win or small win, the player is not notified of it.

It should be noted that the command to be set in the specific area sensor detection process (S208) may be set only to the first V passing command, and the second V passing command and the third V passing command may not be set. In this case, S4414 to S4416 described above are not executed in the received command analysis process (S4302). Even with this configuration, the pachinko game machine can notify the player only when the V passes during the V valid period of the 15R first and fifth big wins. That is, when the effect for notification of V passage is not provided, the command (V passage non-notification command) does not have to be set. However, it is possible to increase the stability of image control by setting a command and controlling the image control board 100 based on the command as in this embodiment.

Finally, the processing of S4417 is performed, and this processing ends. In S4417, as other processing, processing based on other received commands (for example, normal symbol variation start command, normal symbol variation stop command, game state designation command, etc.) excluding the various commands described above is performed (S4417). Among other processes (S4417) performed as processing based on the game state designation command, the game state controlled by the main control side (that is, the current game state) in order to execute the effect received There is a process of setting a flag (game state flag) corresponding to the game state designated by the game state designation command. Specifically, when the normal designation command is received, the normal state flag is turned ON, when the latent designation command is received, the latent state flag is turned ON, and when the time reduction designation command is received, the time reduction state flag is turned ON. , When the probability variation designation command is received, the probability variation state flag is turned ON. The effect control microcomputer 91 selects and sets (determines) a later-described effect mode (mode status), a variable effect pattern, and the like, based on the setting status of these game state flags. In addition, when the production control microcomputer 91 receives the normal designation command when the time saving state flag is ON, that is, the game state is from the time saving state (low probability high base state) to the normal state (low probability low base state) , as other processing (S4417), processing for turning on the specific flag is also performed. The specific flag is a specific period (predetermined period) after the game state changes from the probability variable state (high probability high base state) or the time saving state (low probability high base state) to the normal state (low probability low base state) is a flag indicating

Here, in this embodiment, after moving from the probability variable state (high probability high base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) to normal state (low probability low base state) (after exiting the high base state) , until the variable display of the special symbol is performed five times, the specific effect mode for the limited period is set. The specific effect mode is a different effect mode from the effect modes A to E described later, and a dedicated background image is displayed on the display screen during the specific effect mode. The reason for setting the specific production mode is that immediately after exiting the high base state, the second special reserve that occurred in the high base state remains undigested, and even if the low base state is reached, the second This is because there is a high possibility that the second special symbol, which is more advantageous than the first special symbol, will be variably displayed due to the preferential digestion of the special symbol reservation. In addition, there is also an aim to prevent the player from immediately stopping the game when exiting the high base state (countermeasure against tethering). Incidentally, the setting process of the specific effect mode is also performed as other process (S4417).

[Variation production start processing]
Next, the fluctuation effect start process (S4402) executed in the received command analysis process (S4302) will be described. As shown in FIG. 46, in the variable performance start process (S4402), first, in S4501, the performance control microcomputer 91 generates various performance determination random numbers such as variable performance determination random numbers, advance notice performance determination random numbers, performance symbol determination random numbers, and the like. Random number processing for effect determination (S4501) is performed. In this embodiment, at the timing of receiving the fluctuation start command from the main control unit 80, the process of S4501 is performed, and a predetermined value (acquired information) is obtained from each random number. Based on this acquired value, the aspect of the effect symbol game effect to be executed, the advance notice effect, the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed, etc. are determined.

Subsequently, in S4502, the effect control microcomputer 91 analyzes the variation start command (S4502). The variation start command includes a variation pattern specification command (information specifying a variation pattern) that specifies the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. And, the information specifying the variation pattern includes variation pattern information (P1 to P24) shown in FIG. and the pattern information designating the type of hit are included (see FIG. 8). In addition, since there are those corresponding to the first special symbol and those corresponding to the second special symbol in the variation pattern specification command, by analyzing the variation pattern specification command, the effect symbol game effect to be started this time It becomes possible to determine whether (variation display of the production pattern) is related to the special figure 1 or related to the special figure 2. It should be noted that these variation pattern information, game state information, pattern information, etc. can also be used in processes other than the variation performance start process to be executed thereafter.

Subsequently, in S4503, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the current mode status (S4503). The mode status is for determining the effect mode to be executed, and is set based on the setting state of the game state flag (that is, the game state designation command from the main control board 80). In this embodiment, the mode status is determined by any value from "1" to "5", and each value is assigned to the production modes A to E. The effect mode is a mode of effect in the image display device, and if the effect mode is different, part or all of the effect mode of the game effect such as the notice effect and the ready-to-win effect will be different. Specifically, the characters, items, background images, etc. that appear can be displayed differently on the image display device, and the effect pattern game effect can be executed in a mode corresponding to the effect mode. can. Further, when providing a plurality of game effects (announcement effects, ready-to-win effects, etc.), different game effects may be executed depending on the effect mode.

In this embodiment, the production mode A (mode status 1) is executed when it is controlled to the low probability low base state, and the production mode B (mode status 2) is controlled to the low probability high base state It is executed, and the production mode C (mode status 3) is executed when it is controlled to the high accuracy high base state. Therefore, the player can grasp the current game state by confirming which of the presentation modes A to C is. Moreover, the production mode D (mode status 4) and the production mode E (mode status 5) are executed when being controlled to the high-probability-low base state or the low-probability-low base state. Therefore, when the performance mode is D or E, even if the player confirms the performance mode, the player can grasp whether the probability state of special symbol suitability determination is in a high probability state or a low probability state (normal state). It is difficult to In that sense, production modes D and E can be said to be non-notification modes (latent mode).

Here, in this embodiment, after the big win games related to the 15R first big win and the 15R fifth big win are finished, the effect mode is C, and after the big win games related to the 15R second big win and the 15R sixth big win are finished, the effect mode is B. After the big hit game related to the 15R 3rd big hit ends, it becomes the production mode A. It becomes production mode D or E. Also, even if it is controlled to the low probability low base state, as described above, after the high probability high base state or the low probability high base state ends and becomes the low probability low base state (high base After exiting the state) for a predetermined period (in this example, until the special symbols are displayed five times), the production mode is the specific production mode. In addition, the number of fluctuation display times of the special symbols that determine the execution period of the specific effect mode may not be 5 times, for example, "4 times" equal to the upper limit of the number of special 2 pending balls, or the number of times than 5 times ( For example, 10 times, etc.). Also, the number of times may be determined by a lottery or the like each time the high base state is exited, and may be variable. Furthermore, it may be determined by time (elapsed time, timer) instead of the number of variable display times of special symbols.

Subsequently, in S4504, the image display devices 71 and 72 controlled by the production control microcomputer 91, the board lamp 5, the frame lamp 66, the variable production execution pattern (variable production pattern) for determining the execution pattern (variable production pattern) of the movable decorative member, etc. A production pattern determination table is set (S4504). Specifically, based on the mode status (current production mode) referred to in S4503 and the variation pattern specification command received from the main control unit 80, the variation production pattern determination table to be used is set. For example, when the variation pattern information specified by the received variation pattern specification command is "P1 (variation pattern P1)" (see FIG. 9), as a variation production pattern determination table, the hit time corresponding to the current production mode A variable performance pattern determination table is set. In this embodiment, since a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables corresponding to the effect mode (mode status) are stored in advance in the ROM of the sub-control board 90, at S4504, from among these variable effect pattern determination tables, A table corresponding to the mode status (current production mode) referred to in S4503 is selected and set. The variable performance pattern determination table is mainly for determining the variation mode of the performance pattern (the mode of the performance symbol game performance), and a plurality of variable performance pattern determination tables are stored in advance in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. there is At S4504, one of the plurality of fluctuation effect pattern determination tables is set.

Subsequently, in S4505, based on the variable performance determination random number obtained in S4501 and the variable performance pattern determination table set in S4504, select a variable performance pattern that matches the specified variation pattern and set it (S4505) . As the variable effect pattern, a variation mode (execution mode of the effect symbol game effect) of the effect symbol 8 displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b is set. As a result, in the production pattern game production (variation production), when executing a reach production (variation production with reach), when executing a character production using a predetermined character (variation production with a character), an ally character (" When executing a battle production that expresses a confrontation scene between an enemy character (also called an "enemy character") and an enemy character (also called an "enemy character") (variable production with battle), when neither reach production, character production, or battle production is executed. (Reach-less variable production) and the like are determined.

Here, the ready-to-win production is, for example, the three production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all the same (double) as the display mode of the production pattern 8 when the result of the special pattern success/failure determination indicates a big hit. In the case where different modes (big win mode, specific mode) are provided, two of the three production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) with the patterns constituting the big win mode, and the remaining one is displayed in a variable manner. It means an effect indicating whether or not the remaining symbol is stopped and displayed with a pattern that completes the jackpot mode in the state of continuing (see FIG. 52). In addition, after the start of the variable display of the production pattern 8, two production patterns (in this embodiment, the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R) are stopped (temporarily stopped) at the same number (design). Say.

In the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a variation mode (variation pattern) of the performance pattern 8, reach A, reach B, reach C, super reach (also referred to as "SP reach") A, super reach B, super Reach C and battle production are set, and in S4505, based on the fluctuation production pattern determination table, which production is performed or not produced (this is also called "normal fluctuation production" ) is determined. Then, when the variable performance with reach is executed, one of the ready-to-reach performances is set based on the variation pattern designation command and the variable performance pattern determination table. Here, as the effect pattern game effect, when the super ready-to-win effect is executed, the possibility of a big win is set to be higher than when the normal ready-to-win effect is executed. That is, it can be said that the super ready-to-win effect is a game effect with a high jackpot reliability (possibility of winning a big hit) compared to the ready-to-win (normal reach) effect. In addition, the super reach production includes development production in which the reach production continues (develops) by pretending to be out once during the reach production (also called "development SP reach") and one that does not include development production (" Also referred to as normal SP reach) exists, and the development SP reach is set so that the reliability of the big hit is higher than the normal SP reach. Incidentally, when the normal ready-to-win effect and the super ready-to-win effect are compared, the effect mode from the start of variable display of the effect pattern 8 to establishment of the ready-to-win (second symbol stop) is basically the same. In this embodiment, the ready-to-win effect is mainly set (executed) when a variation pattern specification command specifying a variation pattern with a variation time of 30000 ms or longer (see FIG. 9) is received. That is, the presence or absence of the reach effect is determined by the selection of the variation pattern of the special symbol performed in the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81), and the variation pattern of the special symbol includes "variation pattern with reach". ” and “non-reach fluctuation pattern” exist.

In addition, in this embodiment, the battle production is a dedicated production in the high-probability-high base state (right-handed game state), and the reach production is not executed in the high-probability-high base state. Therefore, in the processing of S4505 in the high probability high base state, based on the variation production pattern determination table for the probability variable state, to determine (select) the battle production pattern in the case of execution presence or absence and execution of the battle production. During the variable display of the performance symbols in the high-accuracy-high base state, the pre-battle-start performance indicating whether or not the battle performance is to be started is usually performed on the display screen of the image display device (the performance symbol display area 7b). there is As the effect before the start of the battle, for example, it is possible to display a effect showing how the friend character encounters the enemy character. Then, the result of the special symbol suitability determination is any of the 15R first big hit, the 15R second big hit, the 15R fifth big hit and the 15R sixth big hit, and any of the variation patterns P1, P2, P13 and P14 (see FIG. 9) reference) is executed (started), the friendly character encounters the enemy character from the start of the accompanying variable display of the effect symbols to the stop (temporary stop) of the second stop symbol. Then, the scene indicating the start of the confrontation is displayed in accordance with the stop (temporary stop) of the second stop pattern, and the battle performance is started. In a high certainty high base state, the start of this battle production indicates a big hit decision. In other words, the battle effect is set (executed) when a variation pattern designation command designating a jackpot variation pattern (see FIG. 9) having a variation time of 45000 ms or more is received. Therefore, the variation patterns of the special symbols include "variation pattern with battle" and "variation pattern without battle", the former being a variation pattern corresponding to a 15R big hit, and the latter being a 2R big hit, a small hit or a miss. A corresponding variation pattern is obtained.

In addition, since the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is mainly performed in the high base state, as a result of the special symbol propriety determination in the high probability high base state, the first special symbol such as the 15R first big hit and the 15R second big hit Corresponding hits are rarely obtained. Also, in the high-probability high base state, if the result of the special symbol propriety determination is out, most will be short fluctuations with a fluctuation time of 2000ms, but sometimes an off fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 3000ms or more may be selected (Fig. 9). In this regard, when the variable display of the special symbols based on the deviation variation pattern of 3000 ms or more is executed, the friend character becomes the enemy before the second stop symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) from the start of the accompanying variable display of the effect symbols. A scene indicating whether or not to start a confrontation between the characters upon encountering the character is displayed, and after that, a scene in which the enemy character retreats without starting the confrontation between the two characters is displayed in accordance with the stop (temporary stop) of the second stop pattern. By doing so, it is assumed that the deviation is confirmed. It should be noted that this refers to the effect of displaying a scene indicating whether or not the ally character encounters the enemy character and the confrontation between the two starts or not, from the start of the variable display of the effect symbols to the stop (temporary stop) of the second stop symbol. It is also called "battle agitation production".

Also, in the battle production, a production display depicting a scene in which friendly characters and enemy characters confront each other is displayed on the display screen. Then, the victory of the ally character (battle production of the winning pattern) indicates that the jackpot confirmed by the start of the battle production is the "V-passing planned jackpot", and the defeat of the ally character (battle production of the losing pattern) indicates that the battle It indicates that the jackpot determined by the start of the presentation is the "V non-passing scheduled jackpot". In other words, the battle production corresponding to the 15R 1st jackpot and the 15R 5th jackpot (V-passing planned jackpot) is the "winning pattern", and the 15R 2nd jackpot and 15R 6th jackpot (V-non-passing planned jackpot). is a “losing pattern”. And the battle victory means the continuation of the variable, and the defeat of the battle means the end of the variable (time-saving rush).

Furthermore, in the winning pattern battle effect, the frame movable decorative member 13 is driven (moved) in time with the display of the victory scene of the ally character, and the effect movable body 13b appears. . By such driving of the frame movable decorative member 13 (appearance of the effect movable body 13b), the battle victory (probability variable continuation) is enhanced, and the amusement of the game is heightened. In addition, the frame movable decorative member 13 (effect movable body 13b), which has entered the operating state (second state) due to the battle victory, is in that operating state (second state) even during the subsequent jackpot game (15R jackpot game). ). Then, with the start of the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot game, the end condition of the frame movable effect is satisfied, and based on the establishment of the end condition, the frame movable decorative member 13 (effect movable body 13b) in the operating state is activated. , the return operation is performed in which the effect movable body 13b is driven in a mode (first drive mode) to return to the initial position (origin). That is, with the reception of the fourth ending command A from the main control section 80, the frame movable decorative member 13 (effect movable body 13b) is driven in the first drive mode, thereby performing the return operation.

In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, "development SP reach" and "normal SP reach" are provided as super reach effects (SP reach A to C). "Frame movable with advanced SP reach" driven (operated) by movable decorative member 13, "Plate movable advanced SP reach with board movable" driven (operated) by board movable decorative member 14, frame movable decorative member 13 and board movable decoration A "non-movable development SP reach" is provided in which none of the members 14 are driven (moved). Developed SP reach with movable frame is set to have higher jackpot reliability than developed SP reach with movable board, and developed SP reach with movable board is more reliable than developed SP reach without movable board. set to be high. Further, in the "advanced SP reach with movable board", one of the movable board decorative members 14L, 14C, and 14R is driven (operated), two are driven (operated) at the same time, and three are driven (operated) at the same time. In the developed SP reach with movable board, all (three) of the movable board decorative members 14L, 14C, and 14R are driven (operated) at the same time. The reliability of the jackpot is set to be the highest, and the reliability of the jackpot is set to be low in the order of the pattern in which the two are driven (operated) at the same time, and the pattern in which one is driven (operated).

Here, in "developed SP reach with movable frame" and "developed SP reach with movable board", the timing at which the movable decorative member in the initial state is driven (operated) (the start timing of the production operation) is the SP reach production. It is the timing (the start timing of the developmental production) at which the ready-to-win production continues (develops) by pretending to be out of position. On the other hand, after the frame movable decorative member 13 (effect movable body 13b) is driven (operated) to be in an operating state, the return operation of driving the effect movable body 13b to the initial position (origin) is the SP reach. It is performed with the end of the variable effect (variable display of the effect pattern). After the board movable decorative members 14 (14L, 14C, 14R) are driven (operated) and appear on the front side of the display screen 71a, the board movable decorative members 14 (14L, 14C, 14R) are moved to the initial positions (origin ) is performed immediately after the SP reach advances to the development performance (after the development performance is started). This is to make it possible to visually recognize the content of the development effect developed on the display screen. In this embodiment, the frame movable decorative member 13 and the board movable decorative member 14 do not perform the performance action (moving from the initial position to the operating position) at the same time. It is a specification that the board movement effect (board effect action) is not performed at the same time. This is to avoid the time period when the power consumption (driving power amount) of the electrical components provided in the game machine becomes excessively large.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the above-mentioned "battle fanning effect" is performed in the high-definition-high base state, the board movable decorative member 14C can operate from the beginning of the change effect. In this case, the board movable decorative member 14C does not appear completely on the front side of the display screen, but only repeats several times a small amount of movement (amount of movement) to return to and return from the initial position. It belongs to Such a small movement (vertical movement in this case) of the board movable decorative member 14C is also referred to as a "flicker movement". Whether or not to execute such a fanning motion is determined based on a variation performance pattern determination table relating to battle performance. It is also possible to drive (operate) the board movable decorative members (14L, 14R) other than the board movable decorative member 14C as the fanning operation. In this case, it is possible to drive one of the board movable decorative members 14L, 14C, and 14R, drive two, or drive all three.

In S4505, a variation production pattern such as normal variation production, ready-to-win production, battle production, etc. is selected and set. In addition, in S4505, in order to emit lamps (LED) such as the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 in a light emission mode according to the variation production pattern (that is, the selected variation production pattern) set in S4505 (light emission production ) is created, and this is stored in the RAM (ramp data output buffer) of the sub-control board 90 (render control microcomputer 91) as lamp data for 2ms timer interrupt processing. This stored lamp data is output by the lamp data output process (S4202) at the timing corresponding to the variable effect pattern, so that the drive (light emission) control of the board lamp 5, the frame lamp 66, etc. is synchronized with the progress of the variable effect. is done. Here, when creating the variable effect lamp data, the return drive flag is referred to as described above, and if the return drive flag is OFF, non-restricted (normal) lamp data is created. On the other hand, when the return drive flag is ON, that is, when the frame movable decorative member 13 is in the return operation, lamp data for a limited state that limits the emission (driving) of the frame lamp 66 (frame LED) is created. do.

In this embodiment, the mode of limitation (method of limitation) when limiting the driving of the frame lamp 66 (frame LED) is varied according to the game state. Specifically, when the game state is a game state other than the high base state (low base state, low base state), the left frame LED board 66L and the right A drive stop mode (also referred to as a “first restriction mode”) is adopted in which all the light emission (driving) of the LEDs mounted on each of the frame LED substrates 66R is stopped. On the other hand, the restriction mode when the gaming state is the high base state is to stop the light emission (driving) of some of the LEDs mounted on the left frame LED board 66L and the right frame LED board 66R. A power-saving drive mode (also referred to as a “second restriction mode”) is set. The power-saving driving mode of this embodiment includes the left first region L1 to left fourth region L4 of the left lens cover portion of the front frame 51 shown in FIG. Corresponds to four regions (lower half regions) of the four regions R4 (among the eight regions in total): the third left region L3, the fourth left region L4, the first right region L1, and the fourth right region R4. The light emission (driving) of the LEDs is stopped, and the LEDs corresponding to the remaining four regions (upper half region) are allowed to emit light (drive) without restriction. The reason why the light emission (driving) of the lower half region is stopped and the light emission (driving) of the upper half region is allowed without limitation is that the image display device of this embodiment has two image display devices arranged vertically. This is because the lenses are arranged side by side, and the line of sight of the player is relatively easy to look upward. This is because it is less noticeable to the player compared to .

Therefore, at the timing when the variable display of the identification information (special pattern, production pattern) is started in the low base state or the low certainty high base state, if the frame movable decorative member 13 is in the return operation, the lamp data for fluctuation production As a result, data (extinguishing data) that does not cause the frame lamp 66 (frame LED) to emit light (drive) at all is created, and this is stored in the RAM (lamp data output buffer). In this case, the frame lamp 66 (frame LED) does not emit light in accordance with the variable display (variable effect). On the other hand, at the timing when the variable display of the identification information (special pattern, production pattern) is started in the high-accuracy-high base state, when the frame movable decorative member 13 is in the return operation, the frame lamp is used as the variable production lamp data. 66 (frame LED) to emit (drive) part of the data (power saving data) is created, this is the RAM (lamp data output buffer). In this case, some frame lamps 66 (LEDs corresponding to four areas out of eight areas of the lens cover portion) emit light in a light emission mode according to the variable effect pattern in accordance with the variable display (variable effect). do.

Thus, when the frame movable decorative member 13 is in the return operation at the start timing of the fluctuation of the identification information (special pattern, production pattern), the reason why the driving of all or part of the frame lamps 66 is limited is that the frame movable When the variable display of the special pattern is newly started during the return operation of the decorative member 13 (the effect movable body 13b), the drive of the frame lamp 66 is not limited at all, and the board surface lamp 5 (board LED) and the board movable body are displayed. Due to the operation of the decorative member 14, etc., the amount of power consumed to drive the electrical components of the game machine (driving power amount) exceeds the allowable range, and various electrical components and power supply boards that make up the game machine are damaged. This is because there is a danger (risk) of causing damage or failure. In particular, in the present embodiment, as described later, as a notice effect pattern of the change notice in the low base state (no low probability time saving, high probability time saving) or low probability high base state (with low probability time saving), production A "movable board accessory announcement" is provided in which the board movable decorative member 14 is driven (operated) with the start of the variable display of the pattern 8. - 特許庁For this reason as well, there is a possibility that the amount of drive power will temporarily become excessive at the start of the variable display. On the other hand, in the high-precision high-base state, such "board movable accessory notice" is not performed, and at the beginning of the fluctuation, the board movable decorative member 14 can be driven (operated) only by one board Since it is only a fanning operation with a small amount of drive by the movable decorative member 14C, it is less likely that the amount of driving power will become excessive at the start of fluctuation compared to the low base state and the low probability high base state. .

Here, as described above, in this embodiment, when the frame movable effect is performed at the start of the development effect during SP reach, and when the ally character victory scene during the battle effect is displayed (probability variable continuation confirmed) Frame movable effect is performed. In the former case, the return operation of the frame movable decorative member 13 (effect movable body 13b) is performed with the end of the variable effect involving the SP reach, and in the latter case, the big hit is executed after the battle effect. With the end of the game (the start of the ending effect), the return operation of the frame movable decorative member 13 (the effect movable body 13b) is performed. Further, as described above, the time required for the return operation of the frame movable decorative member 13 (effect movable body 13b) is 5.5 seconds (5500 ms), and the stop display time (determined display time) of the special symbol is 0.6. seconds (600ms). Therefore, in either case, the variable display of the special symbols can be newly started during the return operation of the frame movable decorative member 13 (the effect movable body 13b).

Under such a configuration (specification), in order to avoid the risk as described above, the next special figure fluctuation display (variation production) is performed until the return operation of the frame movable decorative member 13 (production movable body 13b) is completed. It is conceivable to adopt a configuration in which the game is not started anew, but in this case, there is a risk of hindering the smooth progress of the game, so it is not a good idea. In addition, it is conceivable to simplify the performance by increasing the capacity of the power supply board (power supply unit) or eliminating the board movement performance in which the board movable decorative member 14 is driven (operated) at the beginning of the fluctuation. However, in this case, the cost of the product increases and the performance effect decreases, so neither is a good idea. In this respect, as in the present embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbol is started during the return operation of the frame movable decorative member 13 (the effect movable body 13b), it is possible to limit the driving of the frame lamp 66. , it is possible to prevent the amount of power consumption (driving power amount) from becoming excessive, and by extension, it is possible to avoid hindrances to effects and other games.

In addition, at the start of the development effect during the SP reach, the frame movable effect is performed, and the return operation of the frame movable decorative member 13 (the effect movable body 13b) is performed at the end of the variable effect accompanying the SP reach (development SP reach with the frame movable). is performed, and when the variation performance is a big hit variation, the opening period is started after the variation performance is finished. Since the opening period (opening time) is 8 seconds (8000 ms) as described above, in this case, the return operation (5.5 seconds) of the frame movable decorative member 13 (effect movable body 13b) ends during the opening period. It will be done. Here, in the present embodiment, the presentation during the opening period (opening presentation) is such that the board movable decorative member 14 is not driven (operated). Therefore, even if the opening period starts during the return operation of the frame movable decorative member 13, the possibility of the power consumption (driving power amount) becoming excessive is extremely low (equivalent to zero). For this reason, in the present embodiment, when the next variable display is started (when the board movable effect can be executed) after the variable effect of "developed SP reach with movable frame" is completed, the frame lamp 66 drive is restricted, and when a jackpot game (special game state) is started (when board movement effect is not executed), the restriction state is not entered. This avoids setting the limit state in vain and secures the effect of the opening performance when the big win game is started.

Furthermore, in S4505, when the variable effect pattern set in S4505 is a pattern including the driving (operation) of the movable decorative member (frame movable decorative member 13, board movable decorative member 14), driving (operation) is performed in the variable effect. The drive data for the variable effect of the movable decorative member to be set is created, and stored in the RAM (drive data output buffer) of the sub-control board 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91) as the drive data for the 2 ms timer interrupt processing. By outputting the stored drive data by the drive data output process (S4203) at the timing corresponding to the variable effect pattern, the drive (operation) control of the movable decorative member is performed according to the progress of the variable effect.

In addition, in S4505, based on the random number for determining the performance symbol acquired in S4501 and a stop symbol determination table (not shown), the performance symbol to be stopped and displayed (also referred to as "stop performance symbol") is determined and set. The performance symbols that are stopped and displayed as a result of the performance symbol game performance are odd-numbered symbols such as "777" when the result of the special symbol propriety determination is the 15R 1st and 5th big hits (that is, V passing scheduled big hits). When the 15R 2nd, 3rd, and 6th big hits (that is, V non-passing scheduled big hits) are made, it is an even-numbered pattern such as "666". In addition, when there is a reach out, one of the three production patterns such as "787" is different from the other production patterns, and when there is no reach, there are three productions such as "635". At least one performance pattern of the patterns is selected from a loose pattern different from the other performance patterns. Further, in the case of the 2R fourth big win or small win, a predetermined chance number such as "135" or a dedicated symbol such as "3*3" may be stopped and displayed. In other words, the same production pattern is stop-displayed at the time of the 2R fourth big win and at the time of the small win. For this reason, the player cannot determine whether the 2R fourth big win or the small win is achieved only by confirming the stop-displayed performance symbols. It should be noted that the above-described stop display mode of the production pattern 8 (display result of the variable display) is an example, and it is possible to appropriately change what to stop display as the stop production pattern according to the result of the special design propriety determination.

Next, in S4506, a notice effect setting process relating to the setting of the notice effect is performed (S4506). In this embodiment, various notice effects such as notice effects based on the result of prior determination (reserved look-ahead notice) and notice effects related to the current special figure fluctuation display (variation notice) (variation notice) can be executed. Therefore, in S4506, an execution pattern (announcement effect pattern) of the notice effect including whether or not to execute (execution/non-execution) is set for each notice effect. Specifically, the random number related to the notice effect such as the random number for deciding the notice effect acquired in S4501, the notice effect pattern determination table (not shown) stored in the ROM of the sub control board 90, and the storage of the effect reservation information storage area Based on the contents (performance suspension information), etc., a notice performance pattern is determined and set including execution/non-execution of the notice performance.

In this embodiment, as a notice production pattern of the fluctuation notice related to the execution of the fluctuation production in the low base state (no low probability time saving, high probability time saving) and low probability high base state (with low probability time saving), production pattern The drive (operation) of the board movable decorative members 14 (14L, 14C, 14R) is started along with the start of the variable display of 8, and the drive (operation) is ended at the stop (temporary stop) timing of the first stop pattern. "Board movable accessory notice" is provided. The movable board accessory announcement includes a first board movable accessory announcement that drives one of the board movable decorative members 14L, 14C, and 14R, and a second board movable accessory notice that drives two of the board movable decorative members 14L, 14C, and 14R. There are a second board movable accessory announcement and a third board movable accessory announcement that drives three (all) of the board movable decorative members 14L, 14C, and 14R. At S4506, based on the notice effect pattern determination table, it is determined which of the first to third board movable accessory notices is to be performed or not to be given. Further, when the first board movable accessory announcement or the second board movable accessory announcement is performed, the board movable decorative member to be driven is also determined together. In addition, in the high probability high base state (there is a low probability of short working hours, there is a high probability of short working hours), the notice of the board movable accessories by the board movable decorative member 14 is not performed. This is because, as described above, in the high-probability-high-base state, the start of the battle production indicates the determination of the big hit, and there is a case where a fanning operation is performed along with the execution of the battle fanning production.

Also, in S4506, in order to emit lamps such as the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 in a light emission mode corresponding to the notice effect pattern (that is, the selected notice effect pattern) set in S4506 (to perform light emission effect ) is created and stored in the RAM (ramp data output buffer) of the sub-control board 90 (render control microcomputer 91) as lamp data for 2ms timer interrupt processing. This stored lamp data is output by the lamp data output process (S4202) at a timing corresponding to the notice effect pattern, so that the drive (light emission) control of the board lamp 5, the frame lamp 66, etc. is synchronized with the progress of the notice effect. is done. Here, when creating the advance notice effect lamp data, as in the case of creating the variable effect lamp data described above, the return drive flag is referred to. is created, and if the return drive flag is ON (the frame movable decorative member 13 is in recovery operation), lamp data for the limited state is created. In addition, the limitation mode of driving the frame lamp 66 (frame LED) in the advance notice effect is the same as in the case of the above-described variable effect, and it is also the same that it is changed depending on the game state.

Further, in S4506, if the notice effect pattern set in S4506 is a pattern including driving (movement) of the board movable decorative member 14, that is, if the pattern includes "prediction of movable board accessory", the notice effect pattern The driving data for the advance notice effect of the movable decorative members 14 (14L, 14C, 14R) to be driven (operated) based on is created, and this is used as the driving data for the 2 ms timer interrupt processing, and the sub control board 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91 ) in the RAM (driving data output buffer). The stored drive data is output by the drive data output process (S4203) at a timing corresponding to the notice effect pattern, so that the drive (operation) control of the movable decorative member 14 is executed as the notice effect (preview of movable board accessory). It is done as it progresses.

In addition, the result of the special symbol propriety determination specified by the analysis result of the fluctuation start command in S4502, that is, the result of the propriety judgment (jackpot judgment) related to this special figure fluctuation display (jackpot or off), and the same fluctuation start The variation pattern information of the special symbol specified by the analysis result of the command, that is, the variation pattern related to the special symbol variation display this time, the notice effect pattern set in S4506, that is, the type of notice effect to be executed (notice type) and The mode, the presence or absence of the advance notice effect, etc. will be different. Also, when executing a notice effect, out of a plurality of notice effects, one notice effect (one type of notice effect) may be performed, or two or more notice effects (multiple types of notice effects) may be combined. That is, during one variable display (during variable performance), multiple types of advance notice effects may be performed at respective execution timings.

Then, in S4507, based on the variable production pattern set in S4505 and the notice production pattern set in S4506, the production pattern game production (variation display of production patterns, reach production, notice production, etc.) A variable production start command for starting is set in the sub-output buffer (S4507), and the fluctuation production start process is finished. When the variable effect start command set in S4507 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 outputs the variable effect pattern specified based on the variable effect start command, that is, S4505. Predetermined variable effect image data corresponding to the variable effect pattern set in , and the notice effect pattern specified based on the variable effect start command, that is, the predetermined notice effect image corresponding to the notice effect pattern set in S4506 Data is read out from the ROM of the image control board 100, and a variation effect, an advance notice effect, etc. based on the read image data is executed on the display screen of the image display device. In addition, on the display screen 72a of the second image display device 72, the variable display of the small effect pattern 8a and the fourth pattern is also performed.

[Variation production end processing]
Next, the fluctuation effect end processing (S4407) executed in the received command analysis processing (S4302) will be described. As shown in FIG. 47, in the fluctuation production end process (S4407), first, the current gaming state determines whether it is a low base state (low probability low base state or high probability low base state) (S4601), If not (NO at S4601), the process proceeds to S4609, which will be described later. If so (YES at S4601), it is determined whether or not the specific flag is OFF (S4602). As described above, the specific flag is turned ON when the game state transitions from the high base state to the low base state, and while the specific flag is ON, the production mode is the specific production mode. . Then, if it is determined that the specific flag is OFF (YES in S4602), that is, if the gaming state is in the low base state and has not yet exited the high base state, 1 is added to the variation counter (S4603), and the 1 Set the fluctuation production end command to the sub output buffer (S4604).

The first variable production end command is a command for stopping and displaying the production pattern (production pattern 8, small production pattern 8a and fourth pattern), information indicating the count value of the fluctuation counter after adding 1 in S4603 includes. When the first variable effect end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 stops and displays the effect symbols that have been variably displayed on the display screen of the image display device. Then, the variable performance (performance symbol game performance) is ended, and the variable display count indicated by the count image 77a displayed in the variable count display area 77 is displayed according to the count value of the variable counter. As a result, every time the variable display of the special symbol in the low base state (in principle, the variable display of the first special symbol) is performed, the number of variable display times (number of times image) on the variable number display area 77 is incremented and displayed by one. (count up display).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S4602 that the specific flag is ON (NO in S4602), 1 is added to the specific fluctuation counter (S4605). As described above, when the game state changes to the low base state due to the exit from the high base state, the specific flag is turned ON, and the effect mode is in the specific effect mode until the variable display of the special symbols is performed five times. In response to this, in S4605, 1 is added to a specific variation counter that determines the execution period of the specific effect mode. Then, in the following S4606, it is determined whether or not the value of the specific variation counter is "5" (S4606). (YES in S4606), along with resetting (initializing) the specific variation counter (S4607), in order to end the specific production mode, set the specific production mode end command to the sub-output buffer (S4608), to the processing of S4609 Transition. When the specific effect mode end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 displays an image such as a background for the specific effect mode on the display screen of the image display device. A process for image display (production mode A) for the low-probability-low base state (normal state) is performed.

In S4609, the second fluctuation effect end command is set in the sub output buffer (S4609). Like the first variable effect end command, the second variable effect end command is a command for stopping and displaying the effect patterns (the effect pattern 8, the small effect pattern 8a and the fourth pattern), but the count value of the fluctuation counter is changed. It does not include the information shown. When the second variable effect end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 stops and displays the effect symbols that have been variably displayed on the display screen of the image display device. , to end the variable production (production pattern game production).

[Drive data output processing]
Next, the drive data output process (S4203) executed in the 2ms timer interrupt process (S4009) will be described. As shown in FIG. 48, in the drive data output process (S4203), first, drive data (board drive data ) is stored in the drive data output buffer (S4701). The board drive data is created for each of the three board movable decorative members 14L, 14C, and 14R. disk drive data) and disk drive data for a return operation to drive (operate) from the operating position toward the initial position (board drive data of the first drive mode). In the aforementioned S4505 and S4506, the effect pattern to be set is a pattern including a board movable effect in which the board movable decorative member 14 is driven (operated) (development SP reach with board movable, battle fanning effect, board movable accessory notice, etc.). In some cases, drive data (board drive data) relating to a series of operations from the start to end of the board movement effect are created and stored in the drive data output buffer. In S4701, it is determined whether or not the board driving data is stored.

If it is determined in S4701 that the board drive data is not stored (NO in S4701), the process proceeds to S4704 without performing the process (S4702, S4703) for driving (operating) the board movable decorative member 14. , is stored (YES in S4701), it is determined whether or not it is time to output the stored board driving data (S4702). The timing of outputting the board driving data is determined based on the fluctuation effect pattern or the advance notice effect pattern that triggered the generation of the board driving data. That is, it is determined according to the execution pattern of the board movable production included in the variable production pattern set in S4505 and the notice production pattern set in S4506. In S4702, it is determined whether or not it is the output time based on the execution pattern of the board movable effect (fluctuation effect pattern, advance notice effect pattern).

If it is determined in S4702 that it is time to output the board driving data (YES in S4702), the target board driving data is output (S4703), the process proceeds to S4704, and it is determined that it is not time to output the board driving data. If so (YES in S4702), although there is a plan to drive the board movable decorative member 14, it is not yet time to drive, so the process proceeds to S4704 without outputting board drive data (S4703). By outputting the board driving data in S4703, the movable board decorative member to be driven is driven (operated) in a driving manner corresponding to the output board driving data.

Next, in S4704, it is determined whether or not the return drive flag is ON (S4704). If it is ON (YES in S4704), the process proceeds to S4710. Proceed to processing. As described above, the return drive flag indicates that the frame movable decorative member 13 (effect movable body 13b, electric drive source) is driven according to the drive data for the return operation (drive data of the first drive mode) ( This is a flag for making it possible to specify that the driving status of the frame movable decorative member 13 is in a specific status), that is, that the return operation is being performed. This return drive flag is turned ON at S4709, which will be described later, and turned OFF at S4711, which will be described later.

In S4704, if it is determined that the return drive flag is not ON (NO in S4704), the drive data (frame drive data) of the frame movable decorative member 13 that can be created when setting the previous variable effect pattern (S4505) is the drive data. It is determined whether or not it is stored in the output buffer (S4705). The frame driving data includes driving data for rendering operation (driving data for the second driving mode) for driving (moving) the frame movable decorative member 13 (rendering movable body 13b) from the initial position toward the operation position, and operation position data. There is drive data (driving data for the first driving mode) for a return operation for driving (operating) from the initial position toward the initial position. If the variable effect pattern set in S4505 described above is a pattern including a frame movable effect in which the frame movable decorative member 13 is driven (operated) (development SP reach with frame movable, winning pattern battle effect, etc.), the frame movable effect Drive data (frame drive data) relating to a series of operations from the start to the end of is created and stored in the drive data output buffer. At S4705, it is determined whether or not the frame drive data are stored.

If it is determined in S4705 that the frame driving data is not stored (NO in S4705), processing for driving (operating) the frame movable decorative member 13 (S4706, S4707) and processing related to setting the return driving flag If this processing is completed without performing (S4708, S4709) and it is determined that it is stored (YES in S4705), it is determined whether or not it is time to output the stored frame driving data (S4706). . Similarly to the output timing of the board driving data, the timing of outputting the frame driving data is also determined based on the variable effect pattern that triggered the creation of the frame driving data. That is, it is determined according to the execution pattern of the frame movable production included in the variable production pattern set in S4505. In S4706, it is determined whether or not it is the output time based on the execution pattern (fluctuation effect pattern) of the frame movable effect.

If it is determined in S4706 that it is time to output the frame driving data (YES in S4706), the target frame driving data is output (S4707), the process proceeds to S4708, and it is determined that it is not time to output the frame driving data. If so (YES in S4706), it is not yet time to drive the movable frame decorative member 13 although it is scheduled to be driven. This process is terminated without By outputting the frame driving data in S4707, the movable frame decorative member 13 is driven (operated) in a driving manner corresponding to the output frame driving data.

Next, in S4708, it is determined whether or not the frame drive data output in S4707 is drive data for return operation (drive data for the first drive mode) (S4708). If there is (YES in S4708), the return drive flag is turned ON (S4709), this processing is finished, and if the drive data is not for return operation (NO in S4708), the return drive flag is turned ON (S4709). This processing ends without performing

On the other hand, in S4704, if it is determined that the return drive flag is ON (YES in S4704), it is determined whether the return operation (return drive) of the frame movable decorative member 13 (effect movable body 13b) has ended. It is determined (S4710), and if the return operation (return drive) is completed (YES in S4710), the return drive flag is turned OFF (S4711), this process is finished, and the return operation (return drive) is completed. If not (NO in S4710), this process ends without performing the process of turning OFF the return drive flag (S4711). The determination of the completion of the return operation (return drive) is made, for example, by the completion of the output of the frame drive data for the return operation (the frame drive data of the first drive mode) (the completion of the drive by the drive amount up to the initial position). or based on a detection signal from an origin sensor capable of detecting that the effect movable body 13b is at the initial position.

The above is the main processing by the effect control microcomputer 91. In addition to this, in cooperation with the image control microcomputer 101, control related to the following effect display is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, when the variation mode (variable effect pattern) of the effect pattern 8 corresponds to the character effect or the SP reach effect, at a predetermined time during the variable display of the effect pattern 8 (during the variable display of the special symbol), Production suspension 9a (9b) displayed in the production suspension display area 9c (9d) of the lower image display device 71 (display screen 71a), and the number of times displayed in the variation frequency display area 77 of the upper image display device 72 (display screen 72a) The image 77a is hidden (not displayed).

Specifically, when the variable effect pattern corresponds to the SP reach effect, after the reach is established as shown in FIG. The hold 9a (9b) and the count image 77a are hidden (deleted from the display screen). This is for the purpose of not obstructing the visual recognition of the presentation displayed on the display screens 71a and 72b during the SP ready-to-play presentation. For this reason, in the variable effect pattern including the SP reach, timings for hiding the effect suspension 9a (9b) and the number image 77a are determined. Therefore, when the variable effect start command set in S4507 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 is specified based on the received variable effect start command. When the variable performance pattern corresponds to the character performance or the SP ready-to-win performance, the non-display timing corresponding to the variable performance pattern is determined, and the performance suspension 9a (9b) and the number image 77a are hidden. Incidentally, the non-displayed effect suspension 9a (9b) and the number of times image 77a are respectively displayed (restored) at the timing when the variable effect ends (the effect symbol is stopped and displayed). In this way, the display/non-display of the pending effect 9a (9b) displayed in the pending effect display area 9c (9d) is switched, and the display/non-display of the frequency image 77a displayed in the variable frequency display area 77 is switched. It can be said that the image control microcomputer 101 (image control unit) that performs such processing functions as "display switching means".

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the display of the count image 77a in the variation count display area 77 (display of the number of times of variation display) is displayed when the gaming state is in the low base state (low probability low base state, high probability low base state). ). The effect image (variable effect image) displayed on the display screen of the image display device when executing the variable effect (effect symbol game effect) in this low base state is as follows. That is, the variable effect image displayed on the lower image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and the upper image display device 72 (display screen 72a) in the low base state has four layers (layer L1 ˜L4) are superimposed (synthesized) (layer structure).

Specifically, a layer L1 as a sub-symbol image that constitutes the variable display and stop display of the small effect symbol 8a and the fourth symbol, and a background image that constitutes the background of the display screens 71a and 72a (background of the variable effect) Layer L2 as the main pattern image constituting the variable display (vertical scroll display) and stop display of the production pattern 8, production suspension (special figure suspension image) and number image 77a (variation display number) as Layer L4 is superimposed (synthesized) and displayed on the display screen of the image display device. Processing (image processing) for synthesizing and displaying these layers L1 to L4 is performed under the control of the image control board 100 (image control unit). In addition, since the display of the number of times image 77a (display of the number of times of variable display) is not performed in the high base state, the layer L4 shown in FIG. Use different layers.

In this embodiment, the layer L1 is arranged at the lowest level among the four layers, the layer L2 is arranged above the layer L1, the layer L3 is arranged above the layer L2, and the layer L4 is arranged above the layer L3. It has a layered structure. The arrangement order of each layer can be set in consideration of the possibility (frequency) of switching between display and non-display. That is, in this embodiment, when executing the variable effect, the sub-symbol image is always displayed without being hidden. In addition, the background image may change its appearance due to, for example, a background change effect or the like, and although it will not be hidden, it is more likely that the display appearance will change compared to the sub-symbol image. In addition, the main pattern image may change its display size, display position, pattern design, etc. during the fluctuation effect, and may be temporarily hidden, so compared to the sub pattern image and background image There is a high possibility that the display mode will change. In addition, the effect pending (special figure pending image) and the number of times image 77a (variable display times) can be switched between display / non-display depending on the variable effect pattern as described above, so the sub symbol image, the background image and the main The display/non-display switching frequency is higher than that of the pattern image. In view of these matters, the layer structure shown in FIG. 53 is adopted in this embodiment.

During the execution of the variable effect (SP ready-to-win effect or character effect) that displays such a variable effect image consisting of four layers, if the effect suspension and the number of times image 77a are hidden and then displayed again, A process for switching display/non-display of the layer L4 is performed. Here, in the present embodiment, since the effect pending (special figure pending image) and the number of times image 77a (variation display times) are the same layer, respectively different image display device (lower image display device 71, upper image display device 72) It is possible to hide or display the effect pending and number of times images 77a displayed in the same timing (all at once).

Among the layers L1 to L4, any one or all of the layers L1 to L3 are also referred to as the "first layer", and the layer L4 is also referred to as the "second layer".

In addition, in the present embodiment, as one of the advance notice effects related to the variable display of the identification information (special symbols and performance symbols) in the low base state, the effect that the variable display being executed (the variable display) is a big hit variation. "One-shot notification effect" (simply referred to as "notification effect") for announcing before the end of the variable display can be executed. This notification effect is executed based on the fact that execution of the notification effect is determined in the aforementioned notice effect setting process (S4506) and the execution pattern is set. As execution patterns for the notification effect, there are various execution patterns, such as emitting a predetermined notification sound and causing the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 to emit light in a predetermined color. In this embodiment, a pattern (also referred to as a "number display notification pattern") for changing the display mode of the number image 77a displayed in the variable number display area 77 (display mode of the variable display number) is provided.

In the notice effect setting process (S4506), as described above, based on the random numbers related to the notice effect such as the random number for deciding the notice effect acquired in S4501 and the notice effect pattern determination table stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. , decides a notice performance pattern including execution/non-execution of the notice performance. If the variation pattern of the special symbol that triggers the execution of this notice effect setting process is P1 or P2 (variation time is 45000 ms or more big hit variation), that is, the variation effect pattern set in the above S4505 is reach effect or character In the case of the winning variable effect pattern including effect, lottery related to the execution of the notification effect (also referred to as "number of times display notification effect") based on the number of times display notification pattern is performed in the notice effect setting process (S4506).

In the present embodiment, the number-of-times display notification effect is an effect of changing the display color of the number-of-times image 77a (variable display number of times) from a normal color (for example, silver) to a special color (for example, rainbow color). That is, there are a plurality of variations of the execution timing (execution period) of the number-of-times display notification effect. Specifically, three execution timings are provided: (1) when pattern variation starts, (2) when 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of pattern variation, and (3) when reach is established, and the number of times is displayed according to this execution timing. We have a notification pattern. Here, in this embodiment, the number image 77a (the number of variable display times) is not displayed at the timing when the variable performance develops into the SP ready-to-win performance, but the variable performance pattern to be executed for the number display notification performance is a hit variable performance. It is a pattern, and the execution possibility of SP reach production is high. In view of this, the above (1) to (3) are determined as the execution timing of the number of times display notification effect.

In the notice effect setting process (S4506), whether or not to execute the number of times display notice effect and the execution timing (any of the above (1) to (3)) in the case of execution are determined by a random number lottery. As a result of the lottery, when executing the number of times display notification effect, a variable effect start command including information indicating the execution pattern (execution timing) of the number of times display notification effect is set in the sub output buffer (S4507). The image control microcomputer 101 changes (changes) the display color of the count image 77a from the normal color to the special color according to the execution timing of the count display notification effect specified based on the variable effect start command. It can be said that the effect control microcomputer 91 and the image control microcomputer 101 that perform processing related to the execution of the number of times display notification effect function as "announcement effect means".

[Payout control main processing]
Next, the operation of the payout control microcomputer 116 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 67. FIG. Note that the counter, flag, timer, buffer, etc. appearing in the explanation of the operation of the payout control microcomputer 116 are provided in the RAM of the payout control board 110 (payout control microcomputer 116). When the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the payout control microcomputer 116 provided in the payout control board 110 executes the payout control main processing shown in FIG. Read and run the program. As shown in the figure, in the payout control main process, CPU initialization process is first performed (S5001). In CPU initialization processing (S5001), stack setting, constant setting, CPU setting, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) setting, various flags, timer and counter resetting are performed.

Next, in S5002, it is determined whether or not the power-off signal is ON and the contents of the RAM of the payout control board 110 (payout control microcomputer 116) are normal (S5002). As a result, if the contents of the RAM are not normal (NO in S5002), the RAM is initialized (S5003), and loop processing is performed to enable execution of reception interrupt processing (S5004) and 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. . On the other hand, if the contents of the RAM are normal (YES in S5002), loop processing is performed without initializing the RAM. That is, if the power-off signal is not ON, or if the contents of the RAM are not normal even if the power-off signal is ON (NO in S5002), the RAM is initialized, but the power-off signal is turned ON due to a power failure or the like. However, if the contents of the RAM are maintained normally (YES in S5002), the RAM is not initialized. Initializing the RAM resets the values of various flags, timers and counters. The processing of S5001 to S5003 is executed only once after power is turned on (when the power is turned on), and is not executed thereafter. Also, in this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 116 performs the same processing as the power interruption monitoring processing (S210) by the game control microcomputer 81 shown in FIG. Then, data relating to payout control at that time is stored in the RAM of the payout control board 110 (payout control microcomputer 116). In other words, data relating to payout control is backed up when power failure such as power failure occurs. Therefore, when the power is turned on after recovery from a power failure such as a power failure (recovery from power failure), unless the RAM of the payout control board 110 (payout control microcomputer 116) is initialized (S5003), payout The state of payout control by the control microcomputer 116 returns to the state before the power failure occurred.

[Receive interrupt processing]
In the reception interrupt process (S5004), as shown in FIG. 58, whether or not the strobe signal (STB signal) is ON, that is, the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 is input to the external INT input of the payout control microcomputer 116. It is determined whether or not input has been made to the part (S5101). If it is determined in S5101 that the strobe signal is not ON (NO in S5101), the process ends. On the other hand, in S5101, when it is determined that the strobe signal is ON (YES in S5101), the command transmitted from the main control board 80 (hereinafter also referred to as "received command") is received by the payout control board 110 (for payout control The data is stored in the RAM of the microcomputer 116) (S5102), and the process ends. This reception interrupt process (S5004) is a process that is executed with priority over other interrupt processes (S5005).

[1 ms timer interrupt processing]
The 1 ms timer interrupt process (S5005) is a process that is executed each time an interrupt pulse of 1 ms cycle is input to the payout control board 110. As shown in FIG. 59, in the 1 ms timer interrupt process (S5005), first, a process of adding 1 to the first counter is performed (S5201). The first counter measures the execution timing of the payout control process (S5204), which will be described later. It is to be added (updated) (“0→1→2→3”). In the subsequent S5202, a process of adding 1 to the second counter is performed (S5202). The second counter measures the execution timing of payout-related processing (S5206), which will be described later. (update) ("0→1→2"). The process of S5201 is also called "first counter update process", and the process of S5202 is also called "second counter update process".

Next, in S5203, it is determined whether or not the value of the first counter after the addition of 1 by S5201 is "3" (S5203). If it is "3" (YES in S5203), the first counter is reset (initialized) (S5204) and payout control processing (S5205) described later is performed. Next, in S5206, it is determined whether or not the value of the second counter after the addition of 1 by S5202 is "2" (S5206). If the result is "2" (YES at S5206), the second counter is reset (initialized) (S5207), and payout-related processing (S5208), which will be described later, is performed.

Here, since the processing of S5201 described above is executed based on the timer interrupt that occurs every 1 ms, the first counter is incremented (updated) by 1 every 1 ms. Therefore, when the value of the first counter becomes "3", 3 ms have elapsed counting from the initial value "0". Therefore, the later-described payout control process (S5205) is substantially executed every 3 ms. In addition, since the process of S5202 described above is executed based on a timer interrupt that occurs every 1 ms, the second counter is incremented (updated) by 1 every 1 ms, like the first counter described above. Become. Therefore, when the value of the second counter becomes "2", it means that 2 ms has elapsed counting from the initial value "0". Therefore, the later-described payout-related process (S5208) is substantially executed every 2 ms. Furthermore, in this embodiment, each time the 1ms timer interrupt process (S5005) is executed at a 1ms cycle, the values of the first counter and the second counter are incremented (updated) by 1 by the processes of S5201 and S5202. In the 1ms timer interrupt process of the 6nth round (n is a natural number equal to or greater than 1), the value of the first counter becomes "3" and the value of the second counter becomes "2", so the value of the first counter becomes " The timing when the value of the second counter becomes "3" and the timing when the value of the second counter becomes "2" occur in the same timer interrupt process. In this case, in the present embodiment, since the first counter determination process (S5203) is performed prior to the second counter determination process (S5206), the payout control process is prioritized over the payout related process (S5208). (S5205) is executed. This is because the payout control process (S5205) mainly controls the drive of the payout motor 121 of the payout device 120, as will be described later, and increases the accuracy of the drive control of the payout motor 121.

In the present embodiment, the first counter is set to the initial value of "0" in the range of "0" to "3" and increments the value by one. It may be decremented (updated) one by one. In this case, in the processing of S5203 described above, it is determined whether or not the value of the first counter is "0", and the processing of S5205 is executed each time the value becomes "0" (YES in S5203) It will be done. Similarly, in the present embodiment, the second counter increments the value by 1 with "0" as the initial value in the range of "0" to "2". It may be decremented (updated) by one. In this case, in the processing of S5206 described above, it is determined whether or not the value of the second counter is "0", and each time the value becomes "0" (YES in S5206), the processing of S5208 is executed. It will be done.

[Dispensing device control process]
Next, the payout device control process (S5205) executed in the 1ms timer interrupt process (S5005) will be described. As described above, the dispensing device control process (S5205) is a process executed each time the value of the first counter becomes "3" (substantially every 3 ms). Also referred to as "first control processing". As shown in FIG. 60, in the payout device control process (S5205), first, it is determined whether or not the energization flag is OFF (S5301). The energization flag is a flag for making it possible to specify the state of current supply to the payout motor 121 (stepping motor). This indicates that it is in an energized state (excited state). This energization flag is turned ON in payout motor energization start processing (S5305), which will be described later, and turned OFF in payout motor energization stop processing (S5310), which will be described later.

If it is determined in S5301 that the energization flag is not OFF (it is ON) (NO in S5301), the process proceeds to S5306 without performing the processing of S5302 to S5305, and if it is determined that the energization flag is OFF (NO in S5301), it is determined whether or not it is possible to start the payout operation (S5302). In this embodiment, when the payout sensor 122 fails to detect the game ball (payout ball) due to some abnormality (payout sensor error), the full state of the lower tray 62 is detected by the lower tray full sensor 62a. If it is (lower tray full error) or if the out-of-ball state is detected by the out-of-ball sensor 152 (out-of-ball error), the dispensing operation cannot be started. Also, even if a payout sensor error, a lower tray full error, or a ball out error does not occur, if the rest period timer set in the processing of S5715 described later is not "0", the payout motor 121 The payout operation cannot be started because it is in the rest period. On the other hand, when these errors do not occur and the payout motor 121 is not in the pause period (the pause period timer is "0"), the payout operation can be started. Therefore, in S5302, if any of the payout sensor error, the lower tray full error, or the ball out error has occurred, or if the rest period timer is not "0", it is determined that the payout operation cannot be started. It is determined (NO in S5302), and this process ends without performing the processes after S5303. On the other hand, if not, it determines that the payout operation can be started (YES in S5302), and proceeds to the processing of S5303. The criteria for determining whether or not the dispensing operation can be started (determination conditions, dispensing operation start conditions) are not limited to those shown in this embodiment, and other criteria can be set. is.

In S5303, a payout number setting process (S5303), which will be described later, relating to the setting of the number of game balls to be paid out (the number of payouts) is performed. Details will be described later, but in the payout number setting process (S5303), when there is a request or instruction to pay out game balls as rental balls or prize balls, the number of payouts related to the request or instruction is set in the payout schedule counter. . Next, in S5304, it is determined whether or not the value of the scheduled payout counter set in the payout number setting process (S5303) is "1" or more, and is not "1" or more, that is, it is determined to be "0". If it does (NO in S5304), there is no game ball (prize ball or rental ball) to be paid out, so this process ends without performing the processes after S5305. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the expected payout counter is greater than or equal to "1" (YES in S5304), there will be game balls to be paid out (prize balls or rental balls), so in this case, the payout device 120 (payout motor 121) to start the game ball payout operation, the process proceeds to S5305.

In S5305, payout motor energization start processing, which will be described later, is performed (S5305). Determinations (S5306, S5307) relating to the pre-rotation timer that is set and starts to operate (clock) are performed. Although details will be described later, in the drive control of the payout motor 121 according to the present embodiment, at the start of the payout operation by the payout device 120, first, the payout motor 121 is energized (excited) and the rotary shaft (drive shaft) is driven. is controlled to a "non-rotation energized state" in which the rotor is not rotated, and the non-rotation energized state is maintained for a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) (see "non-rotation energized period" in FIG. 68). Then, the rotation (driving) of the payout motor 121 (rotating shaft) is started based on the lapse of the period for the non-rotation energized state (hereinafter also referred to as "non-rotation energization period"). Corresponding to this, when the pre-rotation flag is ON and the pre-rotation timer is not "0" (YES in S5306, NO in S5307), during the non-rotation energization period for controlling the payout motor 121 to the non-rotation energization state. Therefore, in this case, the process ends without performing the processes after S5308. On the other hand, if the pre-rotation flag is ON and the pre-rotation timer is "0" (YES in S5306, NO in S5307), the no-rotation energization period (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed. In this case, after performing payout motor rotation start processing (S5308), payout motor rotation processing (S5309), and payout motor energization stop processing (S5310), the processing ends. Also, when it is determined that the pre-rotation flag is not ON (it is OFF) in S5306 (NO in S5306), it is set to ON along with the rotation stop of the payout motor 121 in payout motor rotation processing (S5309) described later. It is determined whether or not the after-stop flag is ON (S5311). In this case, without performing payout motor rotation start processing (S5308), payout motor rotation processing (S5309) and payout motor energization stop processing (S5310) are performed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined at S5311 that the post-stop flag is ON (YES at S5311), the payout motor 121 has finished rotating and is in a stopped state. Without performing the payout motor rotating process (S5309), the payout motor energization stop process (S5310) is performed, and this process ends.

[Payout amount setting process]
Next, the number-of-payouts setting process (S5303) executed in the aforementioned payout device control process (S5205) will be described. As shown in FIG. 61, in the payout number setting process (S5303), first, it is determined whether or not there is a loan ball payout request (S5401). Here, the ball rental request is that when the player operates the ball rental button (not shown) provided on the CR operation unit, the operation signal is input to the card unit 135 and received. Then, a ball rental request signal is output from the card unit 135 , and the ball rental request signal is input to the distribution control board 110 . In this embodiment, the card unit 135 outputs the ball rental request signal 5 times for each operation of the ball rental button. of rental balls are paid out (rented out). That is, in this embodiment, 125 rental balls are paid out per operation of the ball rental button. The card unit 135 can arbitrarily set the number of times the card unit 135 outputs the ball rental request signal for each operation of the ball rental button. It is set according to the unit rental price that is determined.

If it is determined in S5401 that there is a ball rental request (YES in S5401), that is, if it is determined that there is an input of the ball rental request signal from the card unit 135, the payout control microcomputer 116 controls the payout schedule counter. is set to "25" (S5402), and the process ends. The planned payout counter indicates the presence or absence of game balls to be paid out and the number of payouts (scheduled payout number) when there are game balls to be paid out, and is a subtraction type in which 1 is subtracted each time one game ball is paid out. is a counter of On the other hand, if it is determined at S5401 that there is no request for ball rental (NO at S5401), it is determined whether or not the value of the winning ball counter is greater than or equal to "1" (S5403). The prize ball counter is a counter that can be set in the command analysis process (S6005) of the payout-related control process (S5208), which will be described later. The number of prize balls specified based on the payout command is set. In other words, the prize ball counter indicates the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls (the number of prize balls), and when the value of the prize ball counter is "1" or more, it means that there is a prize ball payout request. Become.

In S5403, if it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter is not "1" or more, that is, it is "0" (NO in S5403), there is no prize ball to be paid out, so the processing after S5404 is executed. This processing is terminated without performing any operation. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the winning ball counter is "1" or more (YES in S5403), it is determined whether or not the value is "25" or more (S5404), and if it is "25" or more (YES in S5404), "25" is set in the scheduled payout counter (S5405), "25" is subtracted from the winning ball counter (S5406), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the prize ball counter is greater than or equal to "1" and less than "25" (NO in S5404), the current value of the prize ball counter is set to the payout schedule counter (S5407), and the prize ball counter is set. Clear to zero (S5408) and finish this process. If the value of the prize ball counter after subtracting "25" in S5406 is "1" or more, the processing after S5404 is performed in the next payout number setting process (S5303), and the prize ball counter at that time If the value is "25" or more (YES at S5404), the processing of S5405 and S5406 is performed, and if it is less than "25" (NO at S5404), the processing of S5407 and S5408 is performed. In this way, the processing after S5404 is performed until the value of the winning ball counter becomes "0" (until it is determined as NO in S5403).

Here, in the payout number setting process (S5303) of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball counter is "25" or more in S5404. This is because the maximum number of game balls that can be put out per payout operation is 25. This takes into consideration the load applied to the payout motor 121, the temperature rise (heat generation) of the payout motor 121, and the like. In addition, the value of the prize ball counter becomes "25" or more, for example, during a big win game (during a round game), a large winning opening (first big winning opening 30 or second big winning opening 35). A prize ball payout command designating the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of balls entered in quick succession is transmitted from the main control board 80 to the payout control board 110, and a prize ball counter is set based on this command. is. Furthermore, in the payout number setting process (S5303) of the present embodiment, the judgment (S5401) regarding the presence or absence of the request for the payment of the balls is given priority over the judgment (S5403) regarding the presence or absence of the request for the payment of the prize balls (the value of the prize ball counter). Therefore, when both the request for the ball rental and the request for the prize ball are issued at the same time, the rental ball is given priority. This is because the payout of the rental ball (rental ball payout request) is a direct instruction based on the operation of the ball rental button by the player.

[Delivery motor energization start process]
Next, the payout motor energization start process (S5305) executed in the payout device control process (S5205) described above will be described. A series of drive control (S5305, S5308 to S5310) from the start of rotation (start of driving) to the stop of rotation (stop of driving) of the payout motor 121 according to this embodiment is performed according to the flow of the timing chart shown in FIG. . As shown in FIG. 62(a), in the payout motor energization start process (S5305), first, energization to the payout motor 121 is started (S5501). At this time, the payout control microcomputer 116 starts outputting a signal (current control signal) for supplying a rated current to the payout motor 121 via a drive circuit (not shown), and energizes the payout motor 121 with a drive current of 100 %, but the output of the signal (pulse signal) for switching the excitation phase of the payout motor 121 is not started, and the payout motor 121 is placed in a non-rotational energized state (non-rotational excitation state) (S5501). Next, turn ON the energization flag indicating that the payout motor 121 is energized (energized state) (S5502), turn ON the pre-rotation flag (S5503), set the pre-rotation timer for a predetermined time ( S5504), this processing ends. Here, the pre-rotation flag and the pre-rotation timer are for measuring the rotation start timing of the payout motor 121 in the no-rotation energized state, and are referred to in the determination processing of S5306 and S5307 described above. In addition, the pre-rotation timer is a subtraction type timer that defines the time (non-rotation energization period) to keep the dispensing motor 121 in the non-rotating energized state before the dispensing motor 121 starts rotating. Its operation (timekeeping) is started. In this embodiment, the predetermined time set in the pre-rotation timer is 4 ms (see FIG. 68). By the payout motor energization start process (S5305) described above, the payout motor 121 enters a non-rotational energized state (non-rotational excitation state) before the start of the payout operation (before the start of the payout operation). By setting the non-rotational energized state (non-rotational excitation state) before the payout motor 121 starts rotating (before the payout operation starts) in this way, it becomes possible to stabilize the rotating shaft of the payout motor 121. As a result, When the payout motor 121 starts rotating, the game balls positioned in the vicinity (upstream side) of the screw 123 in the ball passage 126 are stabilized (see FIGS. 55 and 56), and the payout of the game balls can be started smoothly. becomes.

[Payment motor rotation start processing]
Next, the payout motor rotation start process (S5308) executed in the payout device control process (S5205) described above will be described. This process (S5308) is executed when the pre-rotation flag is ON (YES at S5306) and the pre-rotation timer becomes "0" (YES at S5307). In other words, this processing is executed based on the lapse of the non-rotation energization period. As shown in FIG. 62(b), in the payout motor rotation start process (S5308), first, the output of a pulse signal (driving pulse) for switching the excitation phase of the payout motor 121 is started, and the payout motor 121 rotates (drives). ) is started (S5601). As a result, the payout motor 121 starts rotating (driving) with the lapse of the non-rotational energization period, and the game ball payout operation by the payout device 120 is started (see FIG. 68). Next, the pre-rotation flag that was turned ON in S5503 is turned OFF (S5602), the rotation start flag is turned ON (S5603), and the process ends. The rotation start flag is a flag indicating that the rotation (driving) of the payout motor 121 has started after the non-rotation energization state has ended (the non-rotation energization period has elapsed). Referenced by

[Processing during payout motor rotation]
Next, the payout motor rotating process (S5309) executed in the payout device control process (S5205) described above will be described. This process (S5309) is a process related to drive control during motor rotation from the start of rotation of the payout motor 121 (start of driving) to the stop of rotation (stop of driving). As shown in FIG. 63, in the process during payout motor rotation (S5309), first, it is determined whether or not a payout sensor error has occurred (S5701). This is for judging whether or not some abnormality such as detection failure has occurred in the payout sensor 122. For example, the signal of the payout sensor 122 is continuously ON for a predetermined time or longer (for example, 1000 ms or longer). , or when a game ball (payout ball) is not detected by the payout sensor 122 even after a predetermined time (for example, 150 ms) has passed since the start of rotation of the payout motor 121 (start of payout operation), a payout sensor error (payout sensor error ) has occurred. Then, if it is determined that a payout sensor error has occurred (YES in S5701), the process proceeds to S5711 (FIG. 64) to be described later, and if it is determined that a payout sensor error has not occurred (NO in S5701) , it is determined whether or not a lower tray full error or ball out error has occurred (S5702). This is to determine whether or not the lower tray 62 is full or the dispensing device 120 is out of balls. When the detection signal of the lower tray full sensor 62a is ON, it is determined that the lower tray full error has occurred. If the detection signal of the blown ball sensor 152 is ON, it is determined that a blown ball error has occurred. If it is determined that a lower tray full error or a ball out error has occurred (YES in S5702), the process proceeds to S5709 (FIG. 64) described later, and both a lower tray full error and a ball out error occur. If it is determined not (NO in S5702), the process proceeds to S5703. In other words, when none of the payout sensor error, lower tray full error, and ball out error occurs, that is, when the payout operation can be performed normally, the process proceeds to S5703.

In S5703, it is determined whether or not the detection signal of the payout sensor 122 has turned ON (S5703). If so (YES in S5703), the scheduled payout counter is subtracted by "1" (S5704). As described above, the expected payout counter indicates the expected payout number of game balls (remaining number of game balls to be paid out). Next, it is determined whether or not the rotation start flag is ON (S5705), and if it is determined that it is not ON (OFF) (NO in S5705), the processing of S5708 (Fig. 64), and when it is determined to be ON (YES in S5705), a signal (current control signal) for reducing the current value of the drive current supplied to the payout motor 121 is output (S5706), and the rotation start flag is turned off (S5705). As a result, after the payout motor 121 starts rotating (after the payout operation starts), the drive current supplied to the payout motor 121 is reduced based on the detection of the first (first) game ball (payout ball) by the payout sensor 122. The current value will drop (see FIG. 68). After that, the payout motor 121 continues to rotate with the drive current suppressed until the end condition of the payout operation is satisfied (for example, until the value of the payout schedule counter becomes "0"). By reducing the current value of the drive current of the payout motor 121 in this way, it is possible to reduce the load on the payout motor 121 and suppress the temperature rise. In addition, after the payout motor 121 starts rotating, the payout sensor 122 detects the first (first) game ball (payout ball), and by lowering the current value, the payout operation is performed at a fixed timing in the initial stage of the payout operation. Since it is possible to reduce the current value, it is possible to increase the certainty of the control related to the reduction of the current value, and to effectively reduce the load on the payout motor 121 and suppress the temperature rise of the payout motor 121 . In this embodiment, the driving current (current value) of the payout motor 121 is suppressed to 75% (that is, reduced by 25%) compared to the start of rotation (100%) (see FIG. 68). . Also, the ratio of decreasing the drive current (current value) (current value after decrease) is not limited to the present embodiment, and can be arbitrarily set in consideration of the specifications of the payout motor.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64, in S5708, it is determined whether or not the value of the planned payout counter after subtracting "1" in S5704 is "0" (S5708), and is not "0" ( is "1" or more) (S5708), this process ends without performing the processes after S5711. In this case, the payout motor 121 continues to rotate. On the other hand, if the value of the expected payout counter is "0" (YES in S5708), that is, if the number of game balls to be paid out in the current payout operation is completed, the drive current supplied to the payout motor 121 to 100% (S5711), stop the output of the pulse signal for switching the excitation phase of the dispensing motor 121, and stop the rotation of the dispensing motor 121 (S5712 ). As a result, the payout motor 121 enters a non-rotationally energized state (non-rotationally excited state) as before the start of rotation (before the start of the payout operation). After the processing of S5712, the post-stop flag is turned ON (S5713), and the post-stop timer and the idle period timer are set for a predetermined time (S5714, S5715), and this processing ends.

Here, the after-stop flag and the after-stop timer are for measuring the timing of stopping (ending) energization of the payout motor 121 in the non-rotating energized state, and are referred to in the motor energization stop processing (S5310) described later. It is a thing. In addition, the post-stop timer is a subtraction type timer that defines the time (non-rotation energization period) in which the dispensing motor 121 is kept in the non-rotating energized state after the rotation of the dispensing motor 121 is stopped. Operation (timing) is started. In this embodiment, the predetermined time to be set in the timer after stopping is 16 ms (see FIG. 68). By setting the non-rotating energized state in accordance with the stoppage of the rotation of the payout motor 121 in this way, the maximum stationary torque of the payout motor 121 is generated at the end of the payout operation, and the problem of extra game balls being paid out can be eliminated. becomes. The time set in the timer after stopping is not limited to this embodiment, and can be arbitrarily determined in consideration of the specifications and performance of the payout motor, the payout speed, and the like.

In addition, the pause period timer is a subtraction type timer that defines a period (pause period) during which the payout operation is paused in order to prevent the payout operation by the payout device 120 (payout motor 121) from being continuously performed for a long period of time. , and its operation (clocking) is started with the processing of S5715 as a trigger. In this embodiment, the predetermined time to be set in the idle period timer is 248 ms (see FIG. 69). In this way, by setting the pause period along with the rotation stop of the payout motor 121, it is possible to prevent the payout operation from being performed continuously for a long time, and a plurality of payout opportunities are established in quick succession. (For example, when a plurality of game balls enter one or more ball entrances in quick succession), it is possible to prevent the corresponding multiple payout operations from being performed in succession. Become. Specifically, in this embodiment, for example, when performing the payout operation of more than 25 game balls, a pause period (pause period timer) is set when the payout of 25 game balls is completed, and the After the pause period has elapsed, the payout operation is resumed, and the remaining game balls are put out (see FIG. 69(a)). In addition, if the next payout opportunity is established during the execution of the payout operation (during the payout operation period), after the payout operation in progress (previous payout operation) is completed, the next payout opportunity is reached after the pause period. A corresponding payout operation (later payout operation) is started (see FIG. 69(a)). In this way, by inserting a pause period in a situation where the dispensing operation is continuously performed, it is possible to reduce the load on the dispensing motor 121 and suppress the temperature rise of the dispensing motor 121. It is possible to plan The time set in the rest period timer is not limited to this embodiment, and can be arbitrarily determined in consideration of the specifications and performance of the payout motor, the payout speed, and the like.

On the other hand, if it is determined at S5701 that a payout sensor error has occurred (YES at S5701), then the processing from S5711 onwards is performed, and the rotation of the payout motor 121 (payout operation) is immediately stopped. Therefore, when a payout sensor error occurs during the rotation of the payout motor 121 (during the payout operation), the rotation of the payout motor 121 (payout operation) is immediately stopped. This is because the game balls cannot be paid out accurately. Also, if it is determined in S5702 that the bottom tray full error or ball out error has occurred (YES in S5702), then it is determined whether or not the detection signal of the dispensing sensor 122 has turned ON (S5709 ), if it is not ON (NO at S5709), this processing ends without performing the processing after S5710, and if it is ON (YES at S5709), "1" is subtracted from the scheduled payout counter (S5710), and after S5711 is performed to stop the rotation of the payout motor 121 (payout operation). Therefore, when the lower tray 62 is full or the ball is out of the payout device 120 during the rotation of the payout motor 121 (during the payout operation), the payout of the next game ball (payout ball) is detected after that. Then, the rotation of the payout motor 121 (payout operation) is stopped (see FIG. 69(b)). This is because the lower tray full error and ball running out error are minor errors compared to the payout sensor error, and the need to immediately stop the payout motor 121 is low.

[Delivery motor energization stop processing]
Next, the payout motor deenergization stop process (S5310) executed in the payout device control process (S5205) described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 65, in the payout motor energization stop processing (S5310), first, it is determined whether or not the post-stop flag is ON (S5801). NO), this process ends without performing the processes after S5802. On the other hand, if it is determined that the post-stop flag is ON (YES in S5801), it is determined whether or not the post-stop timer is "0" (S5802), and if it is determined that the post-stop timer is not "0" (NO in S5802), this processing ends without performing the processing after S5803. Here, the after-stop flag and the after-stop timer are set when the payout motor 121 stops rotating in S5713 and S5714 of the payout motor rotating process (S5309). , 16 ms of non-rotational energization period (non-rotational energization state) are set. Correspondingly, if the post-stop flag is ON and the post-stop timer is not "0" (YES in S5801, NO in S5802), during the non-rotation energization period for controlling the payout motor 121 to the non-rotation energization state. Therefore, in this case, the processing ends without performing the processing after S5803.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the post-stop timer is "0" in S5802 (YES in S5802), the energization to the payout motor 121 is stopped (S5803), and the post-stop flag is turned OFF (S5803). , the energization flag is turned off (S5805), and this processing is terminated. In this way, the energization to the payout motor 121 is stopped based on the passage of the non-rotational energization period after the rotation of the payout motor 121 is stopped (see FIG. 68).

Here, of the series of drive controls from the start of rotation (start of drive) to the stop of rotation (stop of drive) of the payout motor 121 described above, the control based on the processing of S5305 and S5308 is also referred to as "first drive control". The control based on the process of S5706 is also called "second drive control", and the control based on the processes of S5711 and S5712 is also called "third drive control".

[Payment related control process]
Next, the payout-related control process (S5208) executed in the 1ms timer interrupt process (S5005) will be described. As described above, the payout-related control process (S5208) is a process that is executed each time the value of the second counter becomes "2" (substantially every 2 ms). It is also called “second control processing”. In the payout-related control process (S5208), the control process performed by the payout control board 110 (payout control microcomputer 116) other than the payout device control process (S5205) described above. (S6001), output processing (S6002), state monitoring processing (S6003), timer update processing (S6004), command analysis processing (S6005), and other processing (S6006).

In the input process (S6001), detection signals from various sensors such as the lower tray full sensor 62a, ball-out sensor 152, and dispensing sensor 122, and an error canceling switch (not shown) for canceling an error state regarding the dispensing device 120 detection data (edge data and level data) corresponding to various input signals such as detection signals from In the output process (S6002), lighting data for lighting various notification LEDs and 7 segments (not shown) connected to the payout control board 110, various commands for the main control board 80, payout device 120 (payout motor 121 ), and outputs various data and signals such as driving signals (driving data). Commands to be output (transmitted) to the main control board 80 include, for example, the full state of the lower tray 62, the out-of-ball state of the dispensing device 120, and the abnormal dispensing (abnormality of the dispensing motor 121 and the dispensing sensor 122). A command indicating that an error has occurred (error occurrence command), a command indicating that the error has been canceled (error cancellation command), a command indicating that the dispensing operation by the dispensing device 120 (dispensing motor 121) has started (dispensing start command) and other commands that indicate the state of the payout control side. When the main control board 80 receives such a command from the payout control board 110, the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81) provides payout-related notification effects to the sub-control board 90 as necessary. An effect command for execution is transmitted, and in response to this, the sub-control board 90 (effect control microcomputer 91) causes the frame lamp 66 to emit light in a predetermined notification effect pattern, or outputs a predetermined notification sound from the speaker 67. or display a predetermined notification effect image on the image display device.

Next, in the state monitoring process (S6003), the states related to the occurrence and cancellation of errors related to payout, such as the full state of the lower tray 62, the out-of-ball state of the payout device 120, and the payout abnormality (abnormality of the payout motor 121 and the payout sensor 122) monitor. In the timer update process (S6004), various timers such as the pre-rotation timer, the post-stop timer, and the pause period timer are updated. In the command analysis processing (S6005), processing to be described later is performed. Perform communication processing with

[Command analysis processing]
Next, the command analysis process (S6005) executed in the payout related control process (S5208) will be described. As shown in FIG. 67, in the command analysis process (S6005), first, it is determined whether or not the command received from the main control board 80 is stored in the RAM (S6101). The received command from the main control board 80 is received by the above-described reception interrupt process (S5004), and is triggered by the input of the strobe signal (STB signal) from the main control board 80. RAM of the payout control board 110 (payout control microcomputer 116) Stored by If it is determined in S6101 that the received command is not stored (NO in S6101), this processing ends without performing the processing after S6102, and if it is determined that the received command is stored (YES in S6101), the stored It is determined whether or not the received command (received command) is a prize ball payout command (S6102).

In S6102, when it is determined that the received command is a prize ball payout command (YES in S6102), the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball payout command is set in the prize ball counter (S6103), and this process ends. . When there are a plurality of prize ball payout commands received, the number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) specified by each prize ball payout command is set in the prize ball counter. The set prize ball counter is referred to in the aforementioned payout number setting process (S5303), and the value of the prize ball counter is set to the payout schedule counter (S5405, S5407). On the other hand, in S6102, when it is determined that the received command is not a prize ball payout command (NO in S6102), processing according to the received command other than the prize ball payout command is performed (S6104), and this processing ends. In S6104, for example, data for lighting various notification LEDs connected to the payout control board 110, creating data for lighting 7 segments, etc., and setting the production command to be sent to the sub control board 90 to the output buffer are performed. Incidentally, as a received command other than the prize ball payout command, for example, there is a connection confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 80 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. Also, an invalid command that should never be transmitted (or received) from the main control board 80 may be received (received command error).

[Action and effect of the embodiment]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment described above, the first counter update process (S5201) and the second counter update process (S5202) are performed in the 1 ms timer interrupt process (S5005) by the payout control microcomputer 116. A payout device control process (S5205) relating to drive control of the payout device 120 (payout motor 121) is performed each time the value of the first counter reaches "3", and each time the value of the second counter reaches "2". Payout-related control processing (S5208) is performed at this time. Therefore, a plurality of processes with substantially different control cycles, specifically, a control process (S5208) related to the dispensing device 120 (dispensing motor 121) and a control process for other dispensing-related parts (S6001 to S6006) can be performed with one timer interrupt (1 ms timer interrupt in this embodiment) as a trigger. By doing this, for example, due to a model change of a game machine, among various electric parts that have been used before, a specific electric part (for example, a payout motor) is changed to a new part that is different from before, and a new frame is created. , it is possible to design a control suitable for the new component separately from the control related to the conventional electrical component (for example, an electrical component other than the dispensing motor), and the control related to the new electrical component It is possible to obtain a control program that does not cause any trouble even if the conventional control is mixed with the conventional control. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the operation of the gaming machine while securing the degree of freedom in designing, including the selection of electrical components used in the gaming machine. Also, when a plurality of processes with different control cycles are executed with a single timer interrupt as a trigger, there is no need to consider protection of registers and memories against multiple interrupts, which facilitates program design.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, among the components (frame components) provided on the gaming machine frame side (front frame, body frame), frame components (payout device 120 (Payout motor 121, payout sensor 121), payout motor drive circuit, lower tray full sensor 62a, ball out sensor 152, notification LED, etc.), payout device control processing ( S5205) and payout-related control processing (S5208) are performed. This makes it possible to realize control (frame control) related to the frame component suitable for a structural change (model change) of the frame. In addition, by increasing or decreasing the number of counter update processes in one timer interrupt, it is possible to add or delete processes with different control cycles. can be easily dealt with.

In addition, according to the drive control of the payout motor according to the present embodiment, after the payout motor 121 starts rotating (driving), the current value of the drive current is reduced without stopping the rotation (driving) of the payout motor 121. Since the rotation is continued, the load on the payout motor 121 can be reduced and the temperature rise can be suppressed without frequently stopping the rotation (driving) of the payout motor 121 during the payout operation based on one payout opportunity. Further, the drive control of the payout motor does not become complicated, and the smooth payout operation is not hindered.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the image display devices 71 and 72, the movable decorative members 13 and 14, the board surface lamp 5 (board LED), the frame lamp 66 (frame LED), the speaker 67, and the like are provided. It is possible to set a restricted state in which the drive of the frame lamp 66 (frame LED) is restricted among the electrical components. Then, when the variable display of the identification information (special pattern, performance pattern) is started and the frame movable decorative member 13 (the performance movable body 13b) is in the return operation, the restriction state is set and the frame lamp 66 is set. It is possible to limit the drive of Here, when the identification information (special pattern, effect pattern) starts to fluctuate, the special pattern indicator 41, the board lamp 5, the frame lamp 66, the image display devices 71 and 72, the speaker 67, etc., various electric parts provided in the game machine start operating all at once, and this is also the timing at which power consumption (driving power) increases accordingly. At such a fluctuation start time, when the return operation (driving in the first drive mode) of the movable frame decorative member 13 is performed in association with the end of the movable frame effect relating to the previous variable display (variable effect), the change starts. The amount of electric power consumption (driving electric power amount) at this time of year increases more than usual, and under such circumstances, if the electric parts such as the board movable decorative member 14 operate further, the electric power consumption amount becomes excessive. In this respect, in the present embodiment, under the condition that the frame movable decorative member 13 (effect movable body 13b) is performing the return operation at the fluctuation start time, the driving of the frame lamp 66 (frame LED) is restricted and the frame Light emission (driving) of all or part of the lamps 66 (frame LEDs) is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent the amount of power consumption (driving power amount) from becoming excessive, and reduce the risk of causing damage or failure of various electrical components, power supply boards, etc. that make up the game machine. As a result, it is possible to avoid hindrance to various game effects and other game progress, and to ensure stable operation of the game machine.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, at the time when identification information (special symbols, performance symbols) starts to change, the movable frame decorative member 13 is performing a return operation, and the game state at that time is In the case other than the high-precision high base state, all the frame lamps 66 (frame LED) stop emitting (driving), and in the case of the high-precision high base state, part of the frame lamp 66 (frame LED) Light emission (driving) is stopped. In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol success/failure determination in the high-probability-high base state is the V-passing scheduled big hit (15R first big hit, 15R fifth big hit) and the 15R big hit game is performed, before the start of the big hit game A battle production accompanied by a frame movable production is performed in the variable production of , and the frame movable decorative member 13 that has entered an operating state (a state in which the production movable body 13b appears) in the frame movable production is kept in an operating state even during the big win game. , with the start of the ending period (4 seconds) at the end of the jackpot game, a return operation (5.5 seconds) is performed.

Therefore, when the game state when the frame movable decorative member 13 is performing the return action at the fluctuation start time is the high-probability-high base state, this is related to the V-passing scheduled jackpot that occurred in the high-probability-high base state. This is when the first variation display is started after the end of the jackpot game. At the time of the first variable display after such a variable continuation jackpot game, it would be advantageous for the player to stop (restrict) the light emission (driving) of all the frame lamps 66 (frame LEDs). Even though the game is in the game state, the performance effect of the illumination of the front frame 51 (frame lighting performance) is suddenly lowered, and there is a possibility that the player feels uncomfortable. Therefore, when the game state is the high base state when the movable frame decorative member 13 is performing the return operation at the fluctuation start time, all the frame lamps 66 (frame LEDs) are stopped from emitting light (driving). Instead of stopping part of the light emission (driving). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by suppressing the deterioration of the presentation effect.

On the other hand, if the game state when the frame movable decorative member 13 is performing the return action at the fluctuation start time is other than the high-probability high base state, this is the next following the end of the fluctuation performance with the frame movable and the development SP reach. , i.e., when the next variation following the end of the previous outlier variation begins. In this case, even though the SP ready-to-win performance (with frame movement), which has a high degree of reliability for big hits, has been performed, it is after the loss has been confirmed, so the player is greatly disappointed. Even if the light emission (driving) of all the frame LEDs is stopped (restricted), it is considered that there is almost no problem in rendering. Therefore, when the game state when the frame movable decorative member 13 is performing the return operation at the fluctuation start time is other than the high-accuracy high base state, all the frame lamps 66 (frame LEDs) stop emitting light (driving). Instead, the light emission (driving) is partially stopped.

In this way, according to the game state when the frame movable decorative member 13 is performing the return operation at the time when the identification information (special pattern, production pattern) starts to fluctuate, the lamp 66 (frame LED) limitation mode (driving mode ), it is possible to limit the driving of the electrical parts in a way that is suitable for the situation. It is possible to suppress the decline and the decline of game interest.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, under the control of the effect control microcomputer 91 and the image control microcomputer 101 (that is, under the control of the effect), the time until the big hit (first hit) occurs in the low base state The number of variable display times of the special symbol (first special symbol) is counted, and the number of times image 77a (variation display number) based on the count value is displayed in the variation number display area 77 of the upper image display device 72 (display screen 72a). It is a thing. The low base state is a gaming state in which the stay period is longer than the gaming states that are advantageous to the player, such as the jackpot gaming state, the probability variable state, and the time saving state, while the gaming machine is in operation (within the business hours of the gaming hall). This is the basic (base) game state for the player to proceed with the game. The number of variable display times of the special symbol (first special symbol) in the game state, which is the basis of such game progress, is an index (barometer) for judging the game situation (border line, continuation / end of the game, etc.) until the occurrence of the big hit. ), it is of great interest to the player. In this way, by displaying the number of times of variable display, which attracts the player's interest, on the image display device (in this example, the upper image display device 72), the player can see the display contents, and the game hall (island facility) It is possible to grasp the number of variable display times with a small movement of the line of sight without relying on a data display or the like installed in the display.

In particular, the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. In this state, there is a risk that the data display or the like installed in the island facility will be blocked by the frame movable decorative member 13, making it difficult for a player sitting in front of the pachinko game machine 1 (a player playing a game) to see it. be. In this regard, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, the number image 77a (variation display number) is displayed in the variation number display area 77 of the upper image display device 72 (display screen 72a). This is useful in that it is possible to grasp the number of times of variable display without being affected by the configuration of the data display, the specifications of the data display, the manner of installation, or the like.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number image 77a (variation display number) is not displayed in the high base state. This is because, in the high base state, the function of extending the opening of the second starting port 21 (ordinary electric accessory) and the function of shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbols and normal symbols work, and the game ball enters the second starting port 21. The variable display of the second special symbol based on is performed at high frequency, but if the number of times image 77a (number of times of variable display) is displayed under such circumstances, the number of times of variable display indicated by the number of times image 77a increases at high speed. , the display contents change rapidly. The display of the count image 77a (display of the variable display count) in such a high base state is less beneficial for the player than in the case of display in the low base state, and rather makes the player concentrate on the game. There is a danger of harming power. In this regard, such concern can be eliminated by displaying the frequency image 77a (variation display frequency) only in the low base state as in the present embodiment. In addition, in the high base state, instead of the addition display of the number of fluctuation displays in the low base state, the "subtraction display of the remaining number of fluctuation displays" is performed to inform the player of the number of fluctuation display times that can be executed until the high base state ends. ” may be performed. This makes it possible to clearly indicate to the player the end of the high base state.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the situation of the variable effect being executed, specifically, when it develops into the SP reach effect, the effect suspension 9a (9b) displayed so far and the number of times image 77a is hidden, and at the timing when the variable effect ends, it is returned to the original display state (see FIG. 52). This temporarily eliminates the display of the performance suspension and the number of times image (variable display number) that can hinder the visibility of the performance display that is unfolded on the display screen of the image display device during the SP reach performance, and improves the appearance of the performance display. can be improved.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, by changing the display mode (in this example, the display color) of the count image 77a (variation display count), the variable performance during execution (variation display of special symbols) is a big hit. A one-shot notification effect (number of times display notification effect) for announcing the fluctuation can be executed. Therefore, the display of the count image 77a in the variable count display area 77 (display of the number of times of variable display) is not only a mere display of information relating to the progress of the game, but also has the interest of an advance notice effect. As a result, it is possible to obtain a performance effect that has not existed in the past, such as attracting the player's interest to the number image 77a during the variable performance and enhancing the interest in the game.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of variable display times of special symbols is counted for an initial predetermined period (specified period) after the game state shifts from the high base state to the low base state (normal state). In addition, the frequency image 77a (variation display frequency) is not displayed. This is because, immediately after the game state becomes the low base state, the second special symbol reserve that occurred in the high base state immediately before that state remains without being digested, and the second special symbol is more advantageous than the first special symbol. This is because there is a possibility that the special symbol will be displayed in a variable manner. In other words, immediately after shifting from the high base state to the low base state, there is a possibility that the benefits of the high base state (variation display of the second special symbol, which is more advantageous than the first special symbol) can be received in spite of the low base state. , which is different from the pure low base state (normal state). As a result, the frequency image 77a (variation display frequency) displayed in the variation frequency display area 77 does not relate to the variation display of the special symbols in the high base state, but is purely the variation display of the special symbols in the low base state. It becomes possible to clarify that it is related to

In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display screen 71a of the lower image display device 71 occupying the center of the game board 2 (game area 3) and the display screen 72a of the upper image display device 72 positioned above it. A performance symbol display area is provided across both of the above, and the variable display (variation performance) of the performance symbol 8 is performed in the display area. In addition to this, a variable number display area 77 is provided in the upper right part of the display screen 72a away from the center of the game board 2 (game area 3), and the number image 77a is displayed in the display area (display of the number of variable display times). ). This makes it possible to display the count image 77a (variable display count) so as not to interfere with the effect display related to the variable effect.

In particular, in this embodiment, the variation number display area 77, the fourth symbol display area 78, and the small effect symbol display area 8b are positioned above the uppermost end of the outer guide piece 4a provided on the surface of the transparent game board ( That is, it is provided outside the game area 3 (see FIG. 50). Therefore, for example, the game ball flowing down the game area 3 does not hinder the visibility of the count image 77 a (variation display count) or the like in the variation count display region 77 . This makes it possible to improve the visibility of the change count display area 77 and the like.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the upper image display device 72 is arranged with the upper portion of the display screen 72a tilted toward the near side. ) is provided with a change count display area 77 and the like (see FIGS. 50 and 52). Since the variation count display area 77 and the like provided in the projecting portion faces the forehead of the player (a seated player) who plays the game with the pachinko gaming machine 1, the player can see it. For example, during variable display of special symbols (during execution of variable effect), it is possible to grasp (confirm) the number of times of variable display and the like with a small line of sight movement. In particular, since there is no game board (transparent plate) in front of the upper part of the display screen 72a where the number of fluctuation display area 77 and the like are provided, the visibility of the upper part of the display screen 72a is limited to the game board (transparent plate). It is possible to maintain good visibility without being hindered by the plate).

In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display screen size is smaller than that of the lower image display device 71, so that it can be positioned as a sub display device with respect to the lower image display device 71 as a main display device. A change count display area 77 is provided in the image display device 72 . As a result, It is possible to clearly indicate the number of times of variable display, distinguishing it from the main effect display (variable effect) performed mainly by the lower image display device 71 .

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, an image (composite image) composed of a plurality of layers (four in this example) can be displayed on the image display device, and the uppermost (front side) of the images is arranged on the image display device. The special figure reservation image and the number of times image 77a are displayed by the layer L4, and the display / non-display of the layer L4 is switched. As a result, the number image 77a (variation display number) of the layer L4 can be displayed separately from the images (sub-symbol image, background image, main symbol image, etc.) of the other layers L1 to L3, and the number image 77a can be displayed. It is possible to easily switch display/non-display of (variation display count). In particular, in the present embodiment, since the special figure pending image and the number of times image 77a are the same layer, the special figure pending image and the number of times displayed on another image display device such as the lower image display device 71 and the upper image display device 72 The images 77a can be switched between non-display and display at the same timing (all at once). As a result, it is possible to simplify the processing (control) in the case of hiding or displaying the number image 77a and the other information image related to the game situation at the same time, and to switch smoothly. becomes.

In the above-described embodiment, the display screen 72a (display area) of one of the two image display devices (the upper image display device 72), each of which is a liquid crystal display, is provided with the variable display count display region 77. Although the count image 77a (variation display count) is displayed in the count display area 77, the configuration related to the display of the variable display count is not limited to this. Other aspects related to the display configuration of the variable display count will be exemplified below. It should be noted that the following description will omit the description of the configuration, effects, and the like that are common to the embodiment, and mainly the points that differ from the embodiment will be described.

[Other aspect 1]
In the above-described embodiment, both of the two image display devices are liquid crystal display devices. Other display devices such as a drum display device, a 7-segment display device, a dot matrix display device, or the like may be used. In this case, the display located above the display is an image display device (upper image display device 72) consisting of a liquid crystal display similar to that of the above-described embodiment. Display the variable display number display area 77 (number of times image), small effect design display area 8b (small effect design 8a), fourth design display area 78 (special figure 1 fourth design 78a, special figure 2 fourth design 78b) It is possible.

According to this other aspect 1, the lower display device (lower display means) made up of a display other than the liquid crystal display displays the variation effect, and the upper image display device makes up the liquid crystal display. ), it is possible to display the number image 77a, the small effect pattern 8a, and the fourth pattern above it. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to obtain an effect such as being able to clearly indicate the number of variable display times of the identification information, distinguishing it from the main effect display (variable effect).

[Other aspect 2]
In the above-described embodiment, two image display devices are arranged vertically on the back side of the game board 2 (transparent game board). A small display (liquid crystal display, 7-segment display, dot matrix display, etc.) is provided at a predetermined portion of the center decoration surrounding the front side of the display surface (display area) of the display device, and the small display It is also possible to display the number of times the identification information is changed and displayed on the device. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 54(a), a small liquid crystal display is provided at the center of the upper part of the center decoration 10 surrounding the display screen 71a (display area) of the first image display device 71 made of a liquid crystal display. A second image display device 720 consisting of a container is provided, and a variable display number display area, a small effect symbol display area, and a fourth symbol display area are provided on the display screen 720a, and a number image 77a and a small effect symbol 8a are provided in each of these display areas. , special figure 1 fourth design 78a, special figure 2 fourth design 78b shall be displayed. In FIG. 54(a), the same reference numerals as those of the above-described embodiment are omitted or the same reference numerals as those of the embodiment are attached.

Also in the configuration according to the other aspect 2, the number of variable display times of the identification information can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner on the second image display device 720, distinguishing from the main effect display (variation effect) on the first image display device 71. It is possible to achieve the same effects as those of the above-described embodiments. Also in the configuration according to another aspect 2, good visibility can be obtained by arranging the second image display device 720 with its upper end tilted to the front side. In addition, the place where the second image display device 720 (second display means) is provided is not limited to the upper center of the center decoration 10, but the vicinity of the stage portion 11 of the center decoration 10 (lower part of the center decoration 10), Of course, it is also possible to provide them at other locations such as the left side or the right side of the center decorative body 10 .

[Other aspect 3]
In the above-described embodiment, the display screen 72a of the upper image display device 72 is provided with the change number display area 77 in the upper portion thereof, and the change number display area 77 is provided on the outer guide piece 4a (outer rail) provided on the game board 2. ) above (that is, outside the game area 3), the position where the change number display area (number display unit) is provided (the position where the number of times of identification information is displayed) is the game area 3 Other positions outside of are also possible. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 54(b), position A, which is the lower right part outside the game area 3 of the game board 2, position B, which is also the lower left part, and position B, which is also the upper right part. It is possible to provide a number display (number display unit) for displaying the number of times the identification information is changed and displayed at the position C or the like. That is, it is possible to provide a number display (number display section) at a position visible through the viewing window 51 a of the front frame 51 outside the game area 3 . In FIG. 54(b), the same reference numerals as those of the above-described embodiment are omitted or the same reference numerals are assigned.

Even in the configuration according to the other aspect 3, there is no concern that the game ball flowing down the game area 3 hinders the visibility of the number indicator (variable display number), so the number indicator (variable display number) Visibility can be improved. The number display device in this configuration may be of any type, such as a liquid crystal display device, a 7-segment display device, or a dot matrix display device. It is desirable to use a display other than a liquid crystal display, such as a dot matrix display.

In the above-described embodiment, regarding the control by the payout control board 110 (payout control microcomputer 116), a plurality of processes with substantially different control cycles are performed based on one timer interrupt, and the payout motor 121 is driven. Although the configuration for adjusting the current is exemplified, such control can be applied to other than payout control. Other aspects of these controls are exemplified below. It should be noted that the following description will omit the description of the configuration, effects, and the like that are common to the embodiment, and mainly the points that differ from the embodiment will be described.

[Other aspect 4]
In the above-described embodiment, the current value of the drive current is adjusted for the payout motor 121, but the stepping motor that drives the frame movable decorative member 13 (effect movable body 13b, emblem accessory 13s) shown in FIG. , under the control of the sub-control board 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91), control may be performed to adjust the drive current value. Specifically, when executing a frame movable effect in which the emblem accessory 13s is rotated for a predetermined time while the effect movable body 13b is made to appear (see FIG. 49(b)), the effect control microcomputer 91 controls the emblem accessory When starting to drive the emblem motor (not shown) that rotates 13s, energization of the motor is started with a drive current of 100%, and output of a pulse signal for rotating (driving) the emblem motor is started (S5501, S5601). Here, in the above-described embodiment, the timing of the start of energization and the start of rotation (driving) of the payout motor 121 are different, but in this embodiment, the timing of the start of energization and the start of rotation (driving) are the same. Then, a signal (for example, 30% down) for reducing the current value of the drive current of the emblem motor based on the lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) from the start of rotation of the emblem motor (the start of rotation of the emblem accessory 13s). current control signal) to continue rotating the emblem motor. After that, a signal (current control signal) for increasing the current value of the drive current of the emblem motor to 100% is output in accordance with the rotation stop timing of the emblem accessory 13s predetermined by the movable effect pattern, and the emblem motor stops the output of the pulse signal that rotates (drives) the emblem motor to stop the rotation (drive) of the emblem motor (see S5711 and S5712).

According to this aspect 4, it is possible to reduce the load on the emblem motor and suppress the temperature rise of the emblem motor. Further, it is possible to reliably stop the rotation of the emblem accessory 13s at a predetermined stop position. In addition, in the above-described embodiment, an effect (board movable effect) using the board movable decorative members 14 (14L, 14C, 14R) is also provided as a movable effect performed under the control of the sub-control section. It is also possible to adjust and control the drive current value for an electric drive source such as a stepping motor that operates the decorative member 14 .

[Other aspect 5]
In the above-described embodiment, a frame lamp 66 (frame LED) composed of full-color LEDs is provided (see FIG. 1). Targeting the frame lamp 66 (frame LED), under the control of the sub-control board 90 (effect control microcomputer 91), it is also possible to perform control for adjusting the drive current value. For example, when the frame light emitting effect is continuously performed in a predetermined light emitting mode (light emitting effect pattern) from the start to the end of the jackpot game, the effect control microcomputer 91 controls the frame LED to start emitting light (start driving). start outputting an LED drive signal to start energizing the LED with a drive current of 100% (see S5501). Here, in the above-described embodiment, the timing of the start of energization and the start of driving of the payout motor 121 are different, but in this embodiment, the timing of the start of energization and the start of driving are the same. Then, a signal (current control signal) for reducing the current value of the driving current of the frame LED (for example, by 20%) is generated based on the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) from the start of driving (start of light emission) of the frame LED. output to continue driving the frame LEDs. After that, a signal (current control signal) for increasing the current value of the drive current for the frame LED to 100% or decreasing the current value again is output in accordance with the timing predetermined by the light emission effect pattern. Then, an effect of changing the light emission mode (brightness and darkness) of the frame LED is performed.

According to this aspect 5, it is possible to reduce the load on the frame LED (LED drive board) and suppress the temperature rise of the frame LED while not impairing the performance effect of the frame LED. becomes. It is also possible to adjust and control the drive current value not only for the frame LEDs but also for the board LEDs (board surface lamps 5).

[Other aspect 6]
In the above-described embodiment, in the sub-control main process (see FIG. 39), the two control cycles (interrupt cycles) of the 2ms timer interrupt process (S4009) and the 10ms timer interrupt process (S4010) are different. was Instead of these two timer interrupt processing, one 1 ms timer interrupt processing is provided, and in the 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the 1 ms timer interrupt processing is subbed following the payout control main processing (see FIG. 57) of the above-described embodiment. It may be configured to be executed in the control main process. In this case, in the 1 ms timer interrupt processing in the sub-control main processing, the first counter update processing and the second counter update processing are performed. Executes the processing contents (S4201 to S4204) of the 2 ms timer interrupt processing (S4009) shown in , and when the value of the second counter becomes "10", the 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4010) shown in FIG. 42 etc. It may be configured to execute the processing contents (S4301 to S4305) by.

According to such another aspect 6, with one timer interrupt (1ms timer interrupt) by the production control microcomputer 91 as a trigger, the processing related to the 2ms timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 41 and the like, and shown in FIG. It is also possible to execute processing related to 10ms timer interrupt processing. As a result, program design can be facilitated even in the sub-control, and design changes and specification changes can be easily dealt with. In particular, when it comes to the electrical parts used in the sub-control system, there are many different types of moving effects using movable decorative parts (movable accessories) depending on the model, so the electrical parts used are also diverse. Prone. For this reason, for example, depending on the electrical parts used in new models, it may be difficult to perform appropriate performance control (drive control) with existing control processing. control) can be obtained, as in this aspect, by using the counter update process in one 1 ms timer interrupt process by the production control microcomputer 91, by adding or deleting processes with different control cycles It becomes possible to deal with it easily. Specifically, for example, three driving motors, a driving motor A for the movable decorative member A, a driving motor B for the movable decorative member B, and a driving motor C for the movable decorative member C, are provided, and control of each driving motor is performed. If the cycles are "drive motor A: 2 ms", "drive motor B: 3 ms", and "drive motor C: 4 ms", the three counter update processes corresponding to each control cycle are replaced with 1 ms timer interrupt processing. It is possible to configure so that each motor drive control is performed according to the count value (count value updated at 1 ms cycle) by each counter update process.

Also, for example, if you want to improve the processing speed related to the effect display, extract the received command analysis process (S4302) that was performed in the 10ms timer interrupt process (S4010), and use the 1ms timer by the effect control microcomputer 91 A configuration may be adopted in which a counter update process for measuring the execution timing of the received command analysis process is provided in the interrupt process, and the received command analysis process is executed based on the count value obtained by the counter update process. By doing so, it is possible to improve the processing speed related to the effect display. In this way, the configuration that enables execution of a plurality of processes with substantially different control cycles with one timer interrupt (1 ms timer interrupt) as a trigger can be said to be useful when applied to control by a sub-controller. It should be noted that this configuration can be applied not only to the payout control section and the sub-control section, but also to control by other control sections such as the main control section and the image control section.

As described above, examples and other aspects have been described as embodiments of the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to these, and unless it departs from the scope described in each claim, They are not limited, and they can be easily replaced by those skilled in the art, and improvements based on the knowledge that those skilled in the art usually have can be added as appropriate.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, the payout device 120 has a configuration in which the screw 123 is rotated by driving the payout motor 121 to pay out game balls, but the configuration of the payout device is not limited to this. do not have. For example, the present invention can also be applied to a game machine having a payout device that has a sprocket (rotating body) that rotates by driving a payout motor instead of a screw, and that game balls are paid out by the rotation of the sprocket. is.

In the above-described embodiment, a non-rotation energization period (non-rotation energization state) is set before the payout motor starts rotating (before the payout operation starts), and the payout motor starts rotating (driving) after the period has elapsed. However, the non-rotation energization period (non-rotation energization state) before the start of the dispensing operation does not necessarily have to be set.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, after the payout motor starts rotating, the current value of the drive current supplied to the payout motor is reduced based on the detection of the first (first) game ball (payout ball) by the payout sensor. However, the detection of the game ball that triggers the decrease in the current value may not be the first (first) detection, and may be, for example, the second detection. Further, the current value may be reduced based on the elapsed time from the start of rotation of the payout motor instead of detecting the game ball.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a battle effect and a battle fan effect before the battle effect are provided as the variable effect in the high-accuracy-high base state, and the fanning motion by the board movable decorative member 14C can be executed in the battle fan effect. However, this inciting action may not be performed. Since this fanning operation is a performance operation for driving the board movable decorative member 14C from the beginning of the fluctuation performance, the amount of power consumption (driving power amount) at the timing of starting the fluctuation becomes excessive even though the amount of driving is small. This is because it can be said that the effect of not performing the fanning motion is more pronounced in terms of preventing the inflection. Then, in the configuration (specification) where the fanning action is not performed, the identification information (special pattern, production pattern) following the end of the big hit game related to the V passing scheduled big hit (for example, 15R 5th big hit) in the high-accuracy high base state Even if the frame movable decorative member 13 is in the return operation (driving in the first driving mode) when the variable display is started, there is a possibility that the board movable decorative member 14 is further driven (operated) at that timing. becomes nothing. Therefore, in this case, even if the frame movable decorative member 13 is in the return operation, if the game state at that time is the high-probability-high base state, the drive of the frame lamp 66 is not limited (the limit state is set). not), and if the state is other than the high-precision-high base state, the drive of the frame lamp 66 can be limited (a limited state is set). In this way, the driving of the frame lamp 66 is limited (the limited state is set) only when there is a possibility that the power consumption (driving power amount) of the game machine (electrical parts) will become excessive. It is possible to avoid uselessly restricting the drive of the frame lamp 66 (uselessly setting the limit state).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the frame lamp 66 (frame LED) is the electric component that is subject to drive restriction in the restricted state among the plurality of performance electric components. It is not limited to (frame LED). For example, instead of or in addition to the frame lamp 66 (frame LED), the drive restriction target is the board surface lamp 5, or if the effect button 63 is movable, the effect button 63 may be used, or a plurality of image displays may be used. Among the devices, it is possible to use an image display device (sub-display device) having a relatively small display screen size. In other words, the type of electric component for performance that is subject to drive restriction does not matter as long as it is unlikely that the performance or the progress of the game will be adversely affected even if the drive is restricted.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the variable display of the identification information (special symbols, effect symbols) is started, the restriction state is set (the drive restriction flag is However, as long as the movable frame decorative member 13 is performing a return operation, the restricted state may be set regardless of other game conditions. In this way, the restricted state is ensured during the return operation of the frame movable decorative member 13, so that the power consumption (driving power amount) of the game machine (electric parts) becomes excessive during the return operation of the frame movable decorative member 13. can be prevented.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game board 2 is the pachinko game machine 1 composed of a transparent plate (transparent game board), but the present invention is also applicable to a pachinko game machine having a game board composed of veneer. It is possible to

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with the frame movable decorative member 13 at the upper center of the front frame 51, but the present invention can also be applied to a pachinko game machine not provided with the frame movable decorative member. is possible.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the display means (count display section) for displaying the number of times the identification information is displayed is provided on the game board. may Specifically, for example, a display means such as a liquid crystal display is provided on the front surface (side surface on the front side) or bottom surface of the accommodating portion that constitutes the frame movable decorative member 13 provided in the upper center of the front frame 51 shown in FIG. may be provided, and the display means may display the number of times the identification information is changed. In this case, it is desirable to incline the upper part of the display surface forward (toward the player) so that the displayed content can easily enter the player's visual field (visual field), as in the above-described embodiment. In addition, display means such as a liquid crystal display are provided on the left and right sides of the front frame 51 shown in FIG. Alternatively, the display means may display the number of times the identification information is changed and displayed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the variable effect pattern to be executed is a specific variable effect pattern such as including the SP ready-to-win effect, the number of times image (number of variable display times) is displayed or not displayed during the execution of the variable effect. I assumed. In other words, switching between display/non-display of the variable display count is automatically performed based on the variable effect pattern. Instead of this, or in addition to this, switching between display/non-display of the variable display count may be performed based on an input from the outside by a player, a game hall clerk, or the like. For example, by operating the effect button 63 or a switch (not shown) on the sub-control board 90 while the game is not being played, such as during the execution of the demonstration effect, the display/non-display of the variable display count of the identification information is switched. can be made possible. In this way, it is possible to arbitrarily set display/non-display of the number of variable display of identification information.

In the above-described embodiment, the display of the count image 77a (display of the variable display count) is performed in the low base state, but it may be performed in the high base state as well. In this case, the display mode (position, size, color, typeface, etc.) of the count image 77a (variation count display area) may be changed between the low base state and the high base state, or a predetermined variation count unit ( For example, it is desirable to differentiate between "display of the number of variable display times in the low base state" and "display of the number of variable display times in the high base state" by, for example, updating display in units of 10 times. By doing so, it is possible to clearly distinguish and indicate the number of variable display times for each game state.

In the above-described embodiment, one of the two display devices (display means) is provided with the change count display area 77 (count display section) for displaying the change display count of the identification information (count image 77a). However, the present invention can also be applied to a game machine having three or more display devices or a game machine having one display device. In the latter case, for example, a variation number display area (area for displaying the number image) is provided at the edge of the display screen of one effect display device consisting of a liquid crystal display that mainly performs variable display (variation effect) of the effect pattern 8. can be provided. In other words, one display means can be provided with the performance display portion and the number of times display portion. Further, the size of the display screen (screen size) of one liquid crystal display is set to a size such that the upper part of the display screen protrudes above the upper end (upper side) of the game board as in the above-described embodiment. A variation count display area (area for displaying a count image) may be provided in the projecting portion.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the variable effect image displayed on the image display device was superimposed (synthesized) of four layers (layers L1 to L4) (see FIG. 53). The number of constituting layers is not limited to this, and the position (arrangement order) of each layer constituting a layer layer is not limited to the above-described embodiment.

Moreover, in the above-described embodiment, the special figure pending image and the number of times image were displayed on the same layer (layer L4), but they may be displayed on separate layers. In this case, the display/non-display switching of the special figure pending image and the display/non-display switching of the number of times image can be performed independently of each other.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the small effect pattern and the fourth pattern are displayed on the same layer (layer L1), and the special figure reserved image and the number of times image are displayed on the same layer (layer L4). For example, it is possible to display the small effect pattern, the fourth pattern and the number image on the same layer, or display all the small effect patterns, the fourth pattern and the special figure reserved image and the number image on the same layer. is. That is, it is also possible to display any or all of the small effect symbol, the fourth symbol and the special symbol reserved image and the number of times image on the same layer. In this case, images in the same layer as the count image are displayed or hidden as the count image is switched between display and non-display.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the latest acquired random number (acquired information) stored in the special figure reservation storage unit is read for the preliminary determination (hold ahead) based on the starting entry ball, and the read acquired random number (acquired information) is determined (predetermined) (“starting ball entry process (S205)”; see FIGS. 11, 13, etc.), but the method of predetermination is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the special figure holding storage unit, the area (acquired information storage means) that stores the acquired information that is subject to preliminary determination (that is, the acquired information acquired based on the starting ball) is stored in the main control unit and sub-control It may be provided in the RAM of the unit and the obtained information stored in the storage area (preliminary determination storage unit) may be determined (preliminary determination). In this case, by storing the result of the preliminary determination in the RAM of the main control unit or the sub-control unit, it is possible to erase the acquired information used for the preliminary determination (acquired information stored in another storage area). Alternatively, instead of pre-determining the acquisition information stored in the special figure reservation storage unit, it may be pre-determined for the acquisition information acquired based on the starting ball. That is, it may be determined in advance before storing the acquisition information in the special figure reservation storage unit. In this case, there is no need to provide an area for storing the acquisition information to be subject to preliminary judgment separately from the special figure reservation storage unit, and the acquisition information stored in the special figure reservation storage unit need to be read out for preliminary judgment do not have.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the number of rounds of the jackpot game has two types of "2R" and "15R". More than one type may be used, or only one type may be used. Furthermore, the opening pattern of the first big prize-winning hole 30 and the second big prize-winning hole 35 (V Attacker) is not limited to the above-described embodiment. It is possible to adopt the aspect of

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, depending on the length of the opening time of the second big winning port 35 (V attacker) in the V round, the possibility of V passing becomes high (easy) or low (substantially unfavorable). It was possible) and set the case. That is, when the opening time of the second large winning hole 35 in the V round is relatively long, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second large winning hole 35, and the second large winning hole 35 At least one of the entered game balls almost certainly passes through the specific area 39, and on the other hand, when the opening time of the second big winning hole 35 in the V round is relatively short, the second big winning It is difficult (substantially impossible) to enter the game ball into the mouth 35, and as a result, the game ball does not pass through the specific area 39.例文帳に追加Instead of this, a movable piece for opening and closing the specific area is provided, and the movable piece is operated based on the number of balls entering the second big prize-winning opening 35 in the V-round (the value counted by the number of entering balls counting means). , the V passability may differ depending on the operation mode.

For example, when the movable piece is operated based on the first predetermined number (for example, the first ball) of entering the second big prize hole 35 in the V round, the operation mode of the movable piece is changed to the V passability. is lowered (substantially impossible), and when the movable piece is operated based on a second predetermined number (for example, any of the second to the specified number) of hits, the movable piece The operation mode is set to a mode in which the possibility of passing V is increased. Then, a big win in which the movable piece operates only in a manner in which the movable piece is unlikely to pass through the V round, that is, a big win in which the movable piece operates only based on the first predetermined number of balls entering the second big winning hole 35. It is called "V non-passing scheduled jackpot", and there are cases where it operates in a mode with a low possibility of passing V and cases where it operates in a mode with a high possibility of passing V, that is, the first predetermined to the second big winning hole 35 A big hit in which the movable piece operates based on the number of hit balls and the second predetermined number of hit balls may be defined as the "V-passing planned big hit". Even with such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not the probability variation function is activated (whether or not a high probability state occurs) based on whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area, as in the above-described embodiments.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the player is given a game privilege of generating a high probability state based on the game ball passing through the specific area 39 in the V round during the jackpot game (during the special game). However, the benefit referred to in the present invention is not limited to the occurrence of a high probability state. For example, a high-base state that increases the frequency of game balls entering the starting hole, a variable time shortened state (shorter working hours state) that shortens the variable time of identification information, etc. If there is, the content (type) of the privilege does not matter. Moreover, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific area, one privilege may be granted or a plurality of privileges may be granted.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko having a specific area 39 as a variable probability operation opening (so-called "V accuracy machine") to which the present invention is applied is exemplified, but not limited to this, a specific area in the large winning opening 39, and determines whether or not to give a high probability state based on the result of special symbol suitability determination (type of jackpot symbol to be stopped and displayed) (so-called "symbol probability variable machine"). However, the present invention is applicable. Alternatively, the present invention can also be applied to a type of gaming machine that does not have a probability variation function. In addition, a specific area (V area) is provided in the large winning opening that can enter the ball when the result of the special symbol suitability determination is a small hit, and the game ball that enters the big winning opening during the small winning game It is also possible to apply the present invention to a one- and two-type pachinko machine in which a jackpot game is executed when a specific area is passed (V pass), and a jackpot game is executed based on the V pass.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, control processing (so-called special figure 2 Priority fluctuation) was adopted, but not limited to this, it may be a control process (so-called special figure 1 priority fluctuation) that preferentially digests the first special figure reservation to the second special figure reservation. Alternatively, no priority is set for the digestion of the first special reservation and the digestion of the second special reservation, and among the first special reservation and the second special reservation, the oldest one is digested first Control processing (so-called ball entry order (memory order) change) control processing may be used. Also, instead of the special figure 2 priority variation in the above-described embodiment, the first special symbol variation display and the second special symbol variation display (digestion of the first special symbol reservation and digestion of the second special symbol reservation) Control processing to be executed in parallel (so-called special figure 1, 2 simultaneous variation) may be adopted.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the probability variation function can be set to a low probability (first probability) or a high probability (second probability) by deactivating or activating the probability variation function. is not limited to this, for example, three or more types of probabilities can be set, such as medium probability (third probability) higher than low probability (first probability) and lower than high probability (second probability) good too. Furthermore, first low probability and first high probability (first probability condition), second low probability and second high probability (second probability condition), third low probability and third high probability (third probability condition), etc. , a plurality of types of probability conditions that define the relationship between low probability and high probability are provided, and any one of the plurality of types of probability conditions can be arbitrarily set (selected) when the gaming machine is powered on, for example. good too.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the present invention is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, but after inserting game coins as game media, a plurality of reels (reels) are generated based on a predetermined game start operation. is rotated, the rotation of the plurality of drums is stopped based on a predetermined rotation stop operation, and a predetermined privilege is given based on the display mode of the pattern (identification information) indicated by the plurality of stopped drums It is also possible to apply the present invention to a reel-type game machine (slot machine) that can be used.

[others]
Hereinafter, inventions related to the embodiments (examples) disclosed in this specification will be disclosed as reference inventions.

(Reference invention 1)
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines are equipped with various electric parts necessary for their operation. The electrical parts are usually provided in a frame body (game machine frame), a game board, or the like that constitutes the game machine (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2002-11204). Many of the electrical parts installed in game machines are supplied by suppliers, and the specifications of the electrical parts used are taken into account when developing and manufacturing game machines. For this reason, for example, when new electrical parts with specifications different from those used in the past are newly adopted due to a model change of a game machine, etc., design changes or new Development may be required.

However, design changes and new developments of control programs affect the operation of the gaming machine, so from the viewpoint of ensuring stable operation, it is desirable to minimize changes to control details that have been established in the past. On the other hand, if it is attempted to deal with the problem without changing the contents of control, there is a possibility that the degree of freedom in structural design such as selection of parts may be reduced.

This reference invention 1 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and its purpose is to stabilize the motion related to the game without lowering the degree of freedom of design at the time of model change etc. To provide a game machine.

The game machine of Reference Invention 1-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is
A gaming machine capable of playing a predetermined game,
comprising control means for controlling the electrical components,
The control means is
At least a first counter update process for updating the value of the first counter and a second counter update process for updating the value of the second counter can be executed based on one interrupt that occurs every predetermined period. with
each time the value of the first counter updated by the first counter update process reaches a first predetermined value, a first control process relating to the specific electric component can be executed;
Every time the value of the second counter updated by the second counter update process reaches a second predetermined value, a second control process can be executed for an electrical component other than the specific electrical component. is.

In such a game machine, control means for controlling electrical components executes a first counter update process and a second counter update process based on one interrupt that occurs every predetermined period, and the value of the first counter is Each time the value of the second counter reaches the second predetermined value, the second control processing pertaining to the electric component other than the specific electric component is executed. can be executed, it is possible to separately perform the control corresponding to the electrical component with one interrupt as a trigger. As a result, it becomes possible to stabilize the operation of the game machine while ensuring the degree of freedom in design including the selection of electrical components.

In addition, "electrical parts" refers to electrical components necessary for the operation of the game machine, such as various motors, solenoids, LEDs, indicators, sensors, switches, control boards (control circuits), etc. "Specified electrical component" refers to any of those electrical components. In addition, the counter update process that can be executed based on one interrupt that occurs every predetermined period includes not only the first counter update process and the second counter update process, but also, for example, the third counter update process and the fourth counter update process. etc., may include three or more counter update processes. In this case, a counter update process such as a third control process executable based on the count value updated by the third counter update process or a fourth control process executable based on the count value updated by the fourth counter update process can be configured to execute control processing corresponding to Furthermore, the first predetermined value as the value of the first counter that triggers the execution of the first control process and the second predetermined value as the value of the second counter that triggers the execution of the second control process are different values. It doesn't matter if there is one or the same value. This also applies to the case where the third counter updating process, the fourth counter updating process, etc. are provided.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 described above,
The control means determines whether the value of the first counter is the first predetermined value before determining whether the value of the second counter is the second predetermined value. It is characterized by

In such a gaming machine, whether or not the value of the first counter updated by the first counter update process is the first predetermined value is determined by determining whether the value of the second counter updated by the second counter update process is the second counter value. Since the determination of whether or not the value is the predetermined value is performed prior to the determination, the first control process can be performed preferentially over the second control process. This makes it possible to improve the accuracy of the control (first control process) related to the specific electrical component.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 or Reference Invention 1-2 described above,
a game board;
A frame on which the game board is mounted,
The specific electrical component and the electrical component other than the specific electrical component constitute a frame component provided on the frame side.

In such a game machine, the specific electric parts and the electric parts other than the specific electric parts are components (frame parts) on the side of the frame to which the game board is mounted. This makes it possible to realize control (frame control) related to the frame component suitable for a structural change (model change) of the frame.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-4 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 1-1 to 1-3 described above,
A payout means for putting out game balls by driving an electric drive source,
The specific electrical component is the electrical drive source.

In such a game machine, the specific electric component serves as an electric drive source responsible for the payout operation of the game balls by the payout means. can be processed separately. As a result, stable operations can be easily obtained for both the dispensing operation by the dispensing means and other operations.

According to the reference invention 1 described above, it is possible to stabilize the operation related to the game without lowering the degree of freedom of design when the model is changed or the like.

(Reference Invention 2)
A game machine is provided with a payout device (payout means) for paying out game balls as rental balls or prize balls. The payout device is generally configured to be able to pay out game balls by driving a payout motor, solenoid, or the like (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2001-347018).

In a gaming machine equipped with the above-described payout device, for example, when a special game advantageous to the player is started due to the occurrence of a big win or the like, a game ball is inserted into a predetermined ball entrance such as a big winning opening during the special game. A large amount of prize balls are paid out based on the number of incoming balls. In this case, the dispensing device continuously performs the dispensing operation, but the continuous dispensing operation places a load on the dispensing device, and there is a possibility that the dispensing device may malfunction due to heat generated by the dispensing motor or the like. In this regard, in the technique described in Patent Document 1, the driving of the payout motor is temporarily stopped for each payout of one game ball to suppress the heat generation (temperature rise) of the payout motor. Repeatedly stopping and starting the drive of the payout motor each time a coin is paid out complicates drive control of the payout motor.

The present reference invention 2 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and its object is to avoid complicating the drive control of an electric drive source such as a dispensing motor and to control the electric drive source. To provide a game machine capable of suppressing temperature rise.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is
A gaming machine comprising payout means for putting out game balls by driving an electric drive source,
supply means for supplying a drive current to the electrical drive source;
and a control means for controlling the electric drive source,
The control means is
a first drive control for energizing the electric drive source and starting to drive the electric drive source based on the establishment of a predetermined operation start condition;
a second drive control for continuing to drive the electric drive source by reducing a current value of a drive current supplied to the electric drive source at a predetermined time during driving of the electric drive source; It is characterized by something.

In such a gaming machine, based on the establishment of the condition for starting the payout operation, the electric drive source is turned on and after starting to drive the electric drive source, at a predetermined time during the driving of the electric drive source, the electric Since the driving of the electric driving source is continued by decreasing the current value of the driving current supplied to the electric driving source, the driving of the electric driving source is not stopped temporarily. temperature rise can be suppressed. This makes it possible to suppress the temperature rise of the electric drive source while avoiding the drive control from becoming complicated.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 described above,
A detecting means capable of detecting the game ball paid out by the paying-out means,
The control means is characterized in that, in the second drive control, the current value of the drive current is reduced based on detection of a game ball by the detection means.

In such a game machine, the trigger for the second drive control, that is, the trigger for lowering the current value of the drive current is the detection of the game ball that has been put out, so it is possible to increase the reliability of the control. . This makes it possible to achieve stable drive control (payout operation).

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2 described above,
The control means reduces the current value of the drive current based on the first detection of a game ball by the detection means after the operation start condition is satisfied.

In such a game machine, the trigger for the second drive control (the trigger for lowering the current value of the drive current) is the detection of the first (first) game ball after the start of the payout operation, so the reliability of the control can be increased, and the load on the electric drive source (payout means) can be reduced from an early stage of the payout operation. This makes it possible to implement drive control (payout operation) that is effective in suppressing the temperature rise of the electric drive source.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-4 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 2-1 to 2-3 described above,
After the execution of the second drive control, the control means increases the current value of the drive current based on the establishment of a predetermined operation end condition to keep the electric drive source in an energized state. It is characterized in that it is possible to execute third drive control for stopping the drive of the drive source.

In such a game machine, when a payout operation termination condition (stop condition) is established, the electric drive source is kept energized while the current value of the drive current is increased, and the electric drive source is turned off. Since the drive is stopped, it is possible to reliably stop the dispensing operation. This enables accurate payout of game balls.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-5 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 2-1 to 2-4 described above,
In the first drive control, the control means does not start driving the electric drive source until a predetermined time elapses after the electric drive source is energized, and after the elapse of the predetermined time, It is characterized by starting the driving of the electric drive source.

In such a game machine, when starting to drive the electric drive source (starting the payout operation), there is provided a time period during which the electric drive source is energized and the drive of the electric drive source is not started. It is possible to stably start driving the driving source (payout operation). As a result, it is possible to smoothly start the payout of game balls.

According to Reference Invention 2 described above, it is possible to suppress the temperature rise of the electric drive source while avoiding the drive control of the electric drive source such as the payout motor from becoming complicated.

(Reference invention 3)
Conventionally, identification information (e.g., special symbols, performance symbols, etc.) is variably displayed, and a special game advantageous to the player can be executed based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information being the specific display result. Gaming machines are widely known. In this type of game machine, movable bodies (gimmicks), LEDs, speakers, and other electrical components are provided in a frame (game machine frame) that constitutes the outer shell of the game machine and in a game board arranged in the frame. There is a device that enhances the performance effect by driving the electric parts of the performance with the execution of the performance (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-195934).

In a game machine equipped with a plurality of electric parts for presentation as described above, it is possible that two or more electric parts are driven at the same time. If is too large, there is a risk of damage or failure of the power supply unit (power supply board, etc.), drive source (motor, solenoid, etc.) and other devices provided in the game machine, and stable operation of the game machine cannot be guaranteed. In order to cope with this, it is conceivable to adopt a power supply unit with a larger capacity or to simplify the production, but in the former case the product cost will be high, and in the latter case the production effect will be reduced. Neither is a good idea because the

This reference invention 3 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and its purpose is to prevent the drive power amount (power consumption amount) from becoming excessive and to prevent the production and other games from being hindered. To provide a game machine capable of avoiding

The game machine of Reference Invention 3-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is
A gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player based on a display result of variable display of identification information becoming a specific display result,
a production executing means capable of executing production;
a plurality of electrical components that can be driven in performing a performance;
a power supply means for supplying drive power to the electrical component;
and drive control means for controlling the drive of the electrical component,
The drive control means is capable of setting a restricted state in which driving of a predetermined electrical component out of the plurality of electrical components is restricted when the electrical component is driven under a specific condition. is.

In such a game machine, when the driving conditions of the electric parts that can be driven during the execution of the presentation are in a specific situation, a restriction state is set in which the driving of a predetermined electric part among the plurality of electric parts is restricted. is possible. Therefore, in a specific situation, by setting the restricted state, it is possible to reduce the amount of electric power consumed to drive the electrical components (driving electric power amount). In addition, in the restricted state, the driving of a predetermined electrical component among the plurality of electrical components is restricted. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the amount of electric power consumed for driving the electrical parts (driving electric power amount) from becoming excessive, and to avoid interfering with effects and other games.

The term "electrical parts" includes, for example, an image display capable of displaying an image, a movable body (movable member) capable of being operated by an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid, a light emitter such as an LED (light emitting member), Refers to various electrical game parts that are powered and driven, such as speakers that output sound effects. In addition, the "specific situation" is, for example, a situation in which two or more of a plurality of electrical components may be driven at the same time, and depending on the type and number of the electrical components, the driving mode, etc. indicates a situation in which the amount of driving power (power consumption) supplied to electrical components may become excessive. Furthermore, "restriction" refers to suppressing the driving of an electrical component, such as stopping the driving of the electrical component, reducing the driving amount or the number of times of driving, or lowering the driving speed.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 described above,
The drive control means is characterized in that it can set the restricted state in the specific situation when the variable display of the identification information is started.

In such a game machine, it is possible to set a restricted state when the driving state of the electric parts is in a specific state when the variable display of the identification information is started. Therefore, when the variable display of the identification information is started under a specific situation, it is possible to prevent the amount of electric power for driving the electrical components from becoming excessively large due to the variable display. As a result, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the identification information and the accompanying performance from being hindered.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-2 described above,
The drive control means, when setting the restricted state, cancels the setting of the restricted state based on completion of the variable display of the identification information.

In such a game machine, if a restricted state is set assuming that the driving state of the electrical parts is in a specific state when the variable display of the identification information is started, the restricted state is canceled when the variable display ends. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to set the restricted state in units of one variation. This makes it possible to avoid the limit state from being set unnecessarily.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-4 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 3-1 to 3-3 described above,
The specific situation is a situation in which a specific electric component other than the predetermined electric component among the plurality of electric components is driven in a predetermined manner.

In such a game machine, the specific situation is a situation in which a specific electric component, which is different from the predetermined electric component among the plurality of electric components, is driven in a predetermined manner. Therefore, in a situation where a specific electric component is driven in a predetermined manner, driving of a predetermined electric component other than the specific electric component may be restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent a predetermined electric component from being driven at the same time as at least a specific electric component that is driven in a predetermined manner, and it is possible to suppress the amount of electric power required to drive the electric component.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-4 described above,
The specific electrical component includes a specific movable part that can operate in a predetermined operation mode and can take a first state before operation and a second state after operation,
The predetermined mode is a first driving mode in which the specific movable portion in the second state is in the first state.

In such a game machine, a specific electrical component is capable of operating in a predetermined operating mode, and can take a first state (initial state) before operating and a second state (operating state) after operating. It is configured including the part. Then, the drive mode (predetermined mode) of the specific electrical component that is in the specific situation described above is a first drive mode in which the specific movable part in the second state (operating state) is in the first state (initial state). It's becoming Therefore, it is possible to prevent the amount of electric power for driving the electrical component from becoming excessive when the specific electrical component is driven in the first drive mode in order to place the specific movable portion in the first state (initial state). becomes. This makes it possible to prevent the specific movable portion from interfering with the operation (return operation) of returning to the first state (initial state).

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-5 described above,
The drive control means is capable of driving the specific electric component in a second drive mode in which the specific movable part in the first state is in the second state,
When the specific electric component is driven in the second drive mode during execution of the special game, it is possible to drive the specific electric component in the first drive mode upon completion of the special game. It is characterized by

In such a game machine, it is possible to drive specific electric parts in a second drive mode in which the specific movable part in the first state (initial state) is in the second state (operating state). When playing a game, there are cases where specific electrical components are driven in the second drive mode. In this case, when the special game ends, it is possible to drive the specific electric component in the first drive mode, that is, to return the specific movable part to the first state (initial state). . Therefore, with the end of the special game, in a situation where the specific electric parts are driven in the first drive mode in order to put the specific movable part in the first state (initial state), the electric power amount for driving the electric parts becomes excessive. It is possible to prevent this. As a result, it is possible to prevent the return operation to put the specific movable part in the first state (initial state) from being hindered when the special game ends.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-7 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-6 described above,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a predetermined end effect with the end of the special game,
The variable display of the identification information can be started after the end effect is finished,
When the specific electric component is driven in the second drive mode when the special game is executed, the effect time related to the end effect associated with the end of the special game is shorter than the drive time related to the first drive mode. It is characterized by

In such a gaming machine, it is possible to execute a predetermined end effect upon completion of the special game, and after the completion of the end effect, variable display of the identification information can be started. And, when the specific electric part is driven in the second drive mode when the special game is executed (when the specific movable part is set to the second state (operating state)), the effect related to the end effect accompanying the end of the special game The time (end rendering time) is shorter than the drive time associated with the first drive mode, that is, the return action time associated with the return action in which the specific movable portion is in the first state (initial state). Therefore, when the specific electric component is driven in the first drive mode with the end of the special game, the end effect time elapses before the end of the drive, and the end effect ends. Under the condition of being driven in the driving mode, that is, under the condition of performing the return operation of the specific movable part, the variable display of the identification information can be started. By setting the restricted state under such circumstances, the amount of electric power required to drive the electric parts is suppressed, and the recovery operation of the specific movable part accompanying the end of the special game and the fluctuation of the identification information following the end of the special game. It is possible to prevent the display and the accompanying performance from being hindered.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-8 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 3-1 to 3-7 described above,
In the restricted state, driving of a portion of the predetermined electrical component is restricted.

In such a game machine, when a restricted state is set, driving of a part of predetermined electrical components among a plurality of electrical components is restricted. Therefore, the driving of all predetermined electrical components is not restricted. As a result, there are electric components whose driving is not restricted even in the restricted state, so that it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the rendering effect.

Note that "the driving of a part of a predetermined electric component is restricted" means that, for example, when the predetermined electric component is one electric component and the electric component performs a plurality of drives, the driving of the plurality of drives is restricted. It applies that the driving of one or more of them (excluding all of them) is restricted. Further, when the predetermined electric component is a plurality of electric components, it corresponds to restricting the driving of one or more (excluding all of the plurality) of the plurality of electric components. Furthermore, when the predetermined electrical component is a plurality of electrical components, and one of the electrical components performs a plurality of drives, one or more of the plurality of drives (excluding all of the plurality) is restricted. It is applicable to be

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-9 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 3-1 to 3-8 described above,
Having a first electric component and a second electric component as the predetermined electric component,
The first electrical component includes a movable part that can operate in a predetermined operation mode,
the second electrical component includes a light-emitting part capable of emitting light in a predetermined light-emitting mode;
The driving of the second electrical component is restricted in the restricted state.

In such a game machine, as the predetermined electric parts subject to restriction of driving in the restricted state, the first electric part configured to include a movable part capable of operating in a predetermined operation mode, and and a second electrical component including a light-emitting portion capable of emitting light. In the restricted state, the driving of the second electric component is restricted. Therefore, in the limited state, driving of the second electrical component (light emission of the light-emitting portion) is restricted, but driving of the first electrical component (operation of the movable portion) is enabled. Thereby, it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the performance effect.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-10 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-9 described above,
The second electrical component is configured to include a plurality of light emitting units,
In the restricted state, light emission of some of the plurality of light emitting units is restricted.

In such a game machine, the second electrical component includes a plurality of light emitting parts, and in the restricted state, the light emission of some of the plurality of light emitting parts is restricted. . Therefore, in the restricted state, the light emission of all of the plurality of light-emitting portions that constitute the second electrical component is not restricted. As a result, there is a light emitting unit whose light emission (driving) is not restricted even in the restricted state, so that it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the rendering effect.

In addition, "the light emission of a part of the plurality of light emitting parts is restricted" corresponds to, for example, that the light emission of one or more (excluding all of the plurality) of the plurality of light emitting parts is restricted. do. In addition, the term “restriction” as used herein means, for example, preventing the light emitting unit from emitting light (turning off the light), lowering the brightness (light amount) of the light emitting unit, making the light emitting pattern of the light emitting unit monotonous, and so on. It refers to suppressing the driving of (the second electrical component).

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-11 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 3-1 to 3-7 described above,
Having a first electric component and a second electric component as the predetermined electric component,
The first electrical component includes a movable part that can operate in a predetermined operation mode,
the second electrical component includes a light-emitting part capable of emitting light in a predetermined light-emitting mode;
in the restricted state, restricting the driving of the second electrical component;
The drive control means does not set the restricted state when the first electric component is not driven in the specific situation, and does not set the restricted state when the first electric component can be driven in the specific situation. It is characterized by setting the restricted state.

In such a game machine, as the predetermined electric parts subject to restriction of driving in the restricted state, the first electric part configured to include a movable part capable of operating in a predetermined operation mode, and and a second electrical component including a light-emitting portion capable of emitting light, and in the restricted state, the driving of the second electrical component is restricted. Then, even in a specific situation, if the first electrical component is not driven under that situation, the restricted state is not set, and if the first electrical component can be driven, the restricted state is set. I am assuming. Therefore, the restricted state is set (the driving of the second electrical component is restricted) only when there is a possibility that the amount of electric power for driving the electrical component will become excessive. This makes it possible to avoid setting the restricted state in vain.

According to Reference Invention 3 described above, it is possible to prevent the drive power amount (power consumption amount) from becoming excessive, and to avoid interfering with effects and other games.

(Reference Invention 4)
In addition, the game machine of Reference Invention 4-1 for solving the same problem as Reference Invention 3 described above is
A gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player based on a display result of variable display of identification information becoming a specific display result,
a production executing means capable of executing production;
a plurality of electrical components that can be driven in performing a performance;
a power supply means for supplying drive power to the electrical component;
a driving execution means for driving the electric component;
and drive limiting means capable of limiting the drive of the electric component,
The drive limiting means limits driving of a predetermined electrical component other than the specific electrical component among the plurality of electrical components when a specific electrical component among the plurality of electrical components is driven in a predetermined manner. It is characterized by being restrictable.

In such a gaming machine, when a specific electric component out of a plurality of electric components that can be driven in execution of an effect is driven in a predetermined manner, a predetermined electric component other than the specific electric component out of the plurality of electric components is driven. It is possible to limit the drive of electrical components. Therefore, when a specific electric component is driven in a predetermined manner, it is possible to suppress the amount of electric power consumed for driving the electric component (driving electric power amount). In addition, by restricting the driving of predetermined electrical components excluding specific electrical components among the plurality of electrical components and not restricting the driving of all of the plurality of electrical components, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the performance effect. It is possible to plan As a result, it is possible to prevent the amount of electric power consumed for driving the electrical parts (driving electric power amount) from becoming excessive, and to avoid interfering with effects and other games.

The term "electrical parts" includes, for example, an image display capable of displaying an image, a movable body (movable member) capable of being operated by an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid, a light emitter such as an LED (light emitting member), Refers to various electrical game parts that are powered and driven, such as speakers that output sound effects. Further, "restriction" refers to suppressing the driving of an electrical component, such as stopping the driving of the electrical component, reducing the driving amount or the number of times of driving, or lowering the driving speed.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 described above,
The drive limiting means is capable of limiting driving of the predetermined electric component when the specific electric component is driven in the predetermined mode when the variable display of the identification information is started. It is something to do.

In such a game machine, it is possible to limit the driving of a predetermined electric component when a specific electric component is driven in a predetermined manner when the variable display of identification information is started. Therefore, when the variable display of the identification information is started under the condition that the specific electrical component is driven in a predetermined manner, it is possible to prevent the electric component from being excessively driven by the variable display. becomes. As a result, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the identification information and the accompanying performance from being hindered.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2 described above,
The drive limiting means can limit the driving of the predetermined electrical component until the variable display of the identification information ends.

In such a game machine, when a specific electric component is driven in a predetermined manner when the variable display of the identification information is started, when limiting the driving of the predetermined electric component, until the variable display ends, It is possible to limit the driving of the electric parts. Therefore, when the driving of the predetermined electric component is restricted when the variable display of the identification information is started, it is possible to prevent the electric power for driving the electric component from becoming excessive at least until the variable display ends. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the identification information and the accompanying performance from being hindered until the variable display of the identification information ends.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-4 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 4-1 to 4-3 described above,
The specific electrical component includes a specific movable part that can operate in a predetermined operation mode and can take a first state before operation and a second state after operation,
The predetermined mode is a first driving mode in which the specific movable portion in the second state is in the first state.

In such a game machine, a specific electrical component is capable of operating in a predetermined operating mode, and can take a first state (initial state) before operating and a second state (operating state) after operating. It is configured including the part. Then, the driving state (predetermined state) of the specific electric component, which is the premise for restricting the driving of the predetermined electric component, is the specific movable portion in the second state (operating state) as the first state (initial state). This is the first driving mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the amount of electric power for driving the electrical component from becoming excessive when the specific electrical component is driven in the first drive mode in order to place the specific movable portion in the first state (initial state). becomes. This makes it possible to prevent the specific movable portion from interfering with the operation (return operation) of returning to the first state (initial state).

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-4 described above,
The drive execution means is capable of driving the specific electric component in a second drive mode in which the specific movable part in the first state is in the second state,
When the specific electric component is driven in the second drive mode during execution of the special game, it is possible to drive the specific electric component in the first drive mode upon completion of the special game. It is characterized by

In such a game machine, it is possible to drive specific electric parts in a second drive mode in which the specific movable part in the first state (initial state) is in the second state (operating state). When playing a game, there are cases where specific electrical components are driven in the second drive mode. In this case, when the special game ends, it is possible to drive the specific electric component in the first drive mode, that is, to return the specific movable part to the first state (initial state). . Therefore, with the end of the special game, in a situation where the specific electric parts are driven in the first drive mode in order to put the specific movable part in the first state (initial state), the electric power amount for driving the electric parts becomes excessive. It is possible to prevent this. As a result, it is possible to prevent the return operation to put the specific movable part in the first state (initial state) from being hindered when the special game ends.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-5 described above,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a predetermined end effect with the end of the special game,
The variable display of the identification information can be started after the end effect is finished,
When the specific electric component is driven in the second drive mode when the special game is executed, the effect time related to the end effect associated with the end of the special game is shorter than the drive time related to the first drive mode. It is characterized by

In such a gaming machine, it is possible to execute a predetermined end effect upon completion of the special game, and after the completion of the end effect, variable display of the identification information can be started. And, when the specific electric part is driven in the second drive mode when the special game is executed (when the specific movable part is set to the second state (operating state)), the effect related to the end effect accompanying the end of the special game The time (end rendering time) is shorter than the drive time associated with the first drive mode, that is, the return action time associated with the return action in which the specific movable portion is in the first state (initial state). Therefore, when the specific electric component is driven in the first drive mode with the end of the special game, the end effect time elapses before the end of the drive, and the end effect ends. Under the condition of being driven in the driving mode, that is, under the condition of performing the return operation of the specific movable part, the variable display of the identification information can be started. Under such circumstances, by making it possible to limit the driving of the predetermined electric parts, the amount of electric power required to drive the electric parts can be suppressed, and following the return operation of the specific movable part following the end of the special game and the end of the special game, It is possible to prevent the fluctuation display of the identification information to be performed and the accompanying performance from being hindered.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-7 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 4-1 to 4-6 described above,
The drive limiting means can limit the driving of a portion of the predetermined electric component.

In such a game machine, it is possible to restrict the driving of a part of the predetermined electric parts when the driving of the predetermined electric parts is limited when the specific electric parts are driven in a predetermined manner. . Therefore, the driving of all predetermined electrical components is not restricted. As a result, there are electric components whose driving is not restricted even in the restricted state, so that it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the rendering effect.

It should be noted that "limiting the driving of a part of a predetermined electric component" means, for example, when the predetermined electric component is one electric component and the electric component performs a plurality of drives, It applies that one or more than one (but not all of the plural) drives are restricted. Further, when the predetermined electric component is a plurality of electric components, it corresponds to restricting the driving of one or more (excluding all of the plurality) of the plurality of electric components. Furthermore, when the predetermined electrical component is a plurality of electrical components, and one of the electrical components performs a plurality of drives, one or more of the plurality of drives (excluding all of the plurality) is restricted. It is applicable to be

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-8 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 4-1 to 4-7 described above,
Having a first electric component and a second electric component as the predetermined electric component,
The first electrical component includes a movable part that can operate in a predetermined operation mode,
the second electrical component includes a light-emitting part capable of emitting light in a predetermined light-emitting mode;
The drive limiter can limit the drive of the second electric component.

In such a game machine, as the predetermined electric parts whose driving is restricted, the first electric part includes a movable part capable of operating in a predetermined operation mode, and the light emitting device capable of emitting light in a predetermined light emission mode. and a second electrical component including a portion. Then, when restricting the driving of a predetermined electrical component, it is possible to restrict the driving of the second electrical component. Therefore, although the driving of the second electric component (light emission of the light-emitting portion) is restricted, the driving of the first electric component (operation of the movable portion) becomes possible. Thereby, it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the performance effect.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-9 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-8 described above,
The second electrical component is configured to include a plurality of light emitting units,
The drive limiting means can limit light emission of some of the plurality of light emitting units.

In such a game machine, the second electrical component includes a plurality of light-emitting units, and it is possible to limit the light emission of some of the plurality of light-emitting units as targets for driving restriction. It's becoming For this reason, the light emission of all of the plurality of light emitting portions that constitute the second electrical component is not restricted. As a result, even if the driving of the second electric component is restricted when the specific electric component is driven in a predetermined manner, there will be a light emitting unit whose light emission (driving) is not restricted, so that the performance effect will not be reduced. can be suppressed.

Note that "restricting light emission of some of the plurality of light emitting sections" corresponds to, for example, restricting light emission of one or more (excluding all of the plurality) light emitting sections among the plurality of light emitting sections. In addition, the term “restriction” as used herein means, for example, preventing the light emitting unit from emitting light (turning off the light), lowering the brightness (light amount) of the light emitting unit, making the light emitting pattern of the light emitting unit monotonous, and so on. It refers to suppressing the driving of (the second electrical component).

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-10 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 4-1 to 4-6 described above,
Having a first electric component and a second electric component as the predetermined electric component,
The first electrical component includes a movable part that can operate in a predetermined operation mode,
the second electrical component includes a light-emitting part capable of emitting light in a predetermined light-emitting mode;
The drive limiting means does not limit the driving of the second electric component when the specific electric component is driven in the predetermined manner and the first electric component is not driven, and The driving of the second electrical component is restricted when the component is driven in the predetermined manner and the first electrical component can be driven.

In such a game machine, as the predetermined electric parts whose driving is restricted, the first electric part includes a movable part capable of operating in a predetermined operation mode, and the light emitting device capable of emitting light in a predetermined light emission mode. and a second electrical component including a portion. Even when a specific electric component is driven in a predetermined manner, if the first electric component is not driven, the driving of the second electric component is not limited, and the first electric component is driven. It is intended to limit the drive of the second electrical component if possible. Therefore, the driving of the second electrical component is restricted only when there is a possibility that the amount of electric power for driving the electrical component will become excessive due to the driving of the specific electrical component and the first electrical component. This makes it possible to avoid uselessly restricting the driving of the second electric component.

According to the above-described reference invention 4, it is possible to prevent the driving power amount (power consumption amount) from becoming excessive, and to avoid interfering with effects and other games.

1 pachinko game machine, 2 game board, 3 game area, 7b production pattern display area (production display unit), 8 production pattern, 9a first production suspension, 9b second production suspension, 9c first production suspension display area (first production reservation display section), 9d second production reservation display area (second production reservation display section), 13 frame movable decorative member, 13a housing section, 13b production movable body, 13s emblem accessory, 14 board movable decorative member, 20th 1 start opening, 21 second start opening, 30 first big prize opening, 35 second big prize opening, 41a first special symbol display (first special symbol display section), 41b second special symbol display (second special pattern display section), 61 batted ball supply tray (upper tray), 62 surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray), 62a lower tray full sensor, 71 lower image display device, 71a display screen, 72 upper image display device, 72a display screen, 77 variable display number display area (number display unit), 77a number image, 80 main control board (main control unit), 81 game control microcomputer, 90 sub control board (sub control unit), 91 effect control microcomputer, 100 image Control board (image control unit) 101 image control microcomputer 110 payout control board (payout control unit) 116 payout control microcomputer 120 payout device 121 payout motor (electric drive source, specific electric component) 122 payout Sensor, 150 ball tank, 151 gutter member, 152 ball out sensor.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising payout means for putting out game balls by driving a payout motor,
supply means for supplying drive current to the dispensing motor;
a control means for controlling the dispensing motor;
an error monitoring means for monitoring errors related to the payout of game balls ;
The control means receives a payout request for a predetermined number of game balls and turns the payout motor into an energized state on the basis of establishment of conditions for starting a payout operation for paying out the predetermined number of game balls by the payout means. It is possible to execute drive start control to start driving of
In the drive start control, at the start of the payout operation, the rotating shaft of the payout motor is rotated while the payout motor is kept in an energized state until a predetermined non-rotational energization period elapses from the start of the energization of the payout motor. and starting rotation of the rotating shaft based on the lapse of the non-rotating energization period ,
Further, the control means can execute drive stop control for stopping the drive of the payout motor when the error occurs before the payout of the predetermined number of game balls is completed after the drive start control is executed. ,
In the drive stop control, the rotation of the rotating shaft is stopped while the payout motor is kept in an energized state for a period longer than the non-rotation energizing period.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images